OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System V100R002C00
Commissioning and Configuration Guide Issue
03
Date
2014-11-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
About This Document
About This Document Related Versions The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name
Version
OptiX RTN 380
V100R002C00
iManager U2000–T
V200R014C60
Intended Audience This document describes how to commission OptiX RTN 380, including preparations, site commissioning, system commissioning, and network-wide service data configuration. This document is intended for: l
Installation and commissioning engineers
l
Data configuration engineers
l
System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol
Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
About This Document
Convention
Description
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the changes made in earlier issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2014-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00 This document is the third release of the V100R002C00 version. Change
Description
–
Fixed the known bugs.
Updates in Issue 02 (2014-10-15) Based on Product Version V100R002C00 This document is the second release of the V100R002C00 version. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
About This Document
Change
Description
–
Fixed the known bugs.
5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment
Supplements the Wi-Fi connection mode for Web LCT.
5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method
Issue 01 (2014-06-30) This issue is the first release for the product version V100R002C00.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1 1.1 General Safety Precautions.............................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.........................................................................................................................................3 1.3 Electrical Safety..............................................................................................................................................................4 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.....................................................................................................................................5 1.5 Storage Batteries.............................................................................................................................................................6 1.6 Radiation.........................................................................................................................................................................8 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.......................................................................................................................................8 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure...........................................................................................................................................9 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas..........................................................................................................................................................9 1.6.4 Laser............................................................................................................................................................................9 1.6.5 Microwave.................................................................................................................................................................10 1.7 Working at Heights.......................................................................................................................................................10 1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects.............................................................................................................................................11 1.7.2 Using Ladders............................................................................................................................................................12 1.8 Mechanical Safety........................................................................................................................................................14 1.9 Other Precautions.........................................................................................................................................................15
2 Commissioning Preparations....................................................................................................17 2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools...................................................................................................................................18 2.2 Preparing the Certificate File for NE Access from a USB Flash Drive.......................................................................19 2.3 Preparing a USB Flash Drive.......................................................................................................................................21 2.4 Determining the Commissioning Method....................................................................................................................22 2.5 Checking Commissioning Conditions..........................................................................................................................23 2.5.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions................................................................................................................24 2.5.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions..........................................................................................................24
3 Commissioning Process.............................................................................................................25 3.1 Site Commissioning Process (Without 1+1 Protection)...............................................................................................26 3.2 Site Commissioning Procedure (with 1+1 Protection).................................................................................................27 3.3 System Commissioning Process...................................................................................................................................31
4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data).................................33 Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
4.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380......................................................................................................................................34 4.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI)..................................................................................................................34 4.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE)................................................................................................37 4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive............................................................................................38 4.3 Using the Web LCT to Complete Subsequent Commissioning Items.........................................................................39
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)..........................................41 5.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380......................................................................................................................................43 5.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI)..................................................................................................................43 5.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE)................................................................................................46 5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment................................................................................................................47 5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method.......................................................................................................................51 5.4 Delivering a Commissioning Data Script to an NE Using the Web LCT....................................................................53 5.5 Configuring Site Commissioning Data.........................................................................................................................54 5.5.1 Changing an NE ID...................................................................................................................................................55 5.5.2 Changing an NE Name..............................................................................................................................................56 5.5.3 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN.......................................................................................56 5.5.4 Deleting an E-LAN Service.......................................................................................................................................57 5.5.5 Creating a LAG.........................................................................................................................................................58 5.5.6 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link..........................................................................................................59 5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group...........................................................60 5.6 Checking Alarms..........................................................................................................................................................61 5.7 Aligning Antennas........................................................................................................................................................62 5.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes........................................................................................................................................62 5.7.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.........................................................................................................................65 5.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power...........................................................................................67
6 System Commissioning..............................................................................................................69 6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data.....................................................................................................................71 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services.............................................................................................................................................71 6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis.........................................................................................71 6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode.....................................................................................74 6.3 Verifying CPRI Service Configurations.......................................................................................................................76 6.4 Testing AMAC Shifting...............................................................................................................................................79 6.5 Testing Protection Switching........................................................................................................................................80 6.5.1 Testing ERPS Switching...........................................................................................................................................80 6.5.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching.............................................................................................................................83 6.6 Checking the Clock Status............................................................................................................................................85 6.7 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link........................................................................................................86 6.8 Testing Ethernet Service Performance.........................................................................................................................88 6.8.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio.........................................................................................88 6.8.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio.................................................................................................................91 Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment......................................................96 7.1 Handling a Fault in Commissioning Script Loading Using a USB Flash Drive..........................................................97 7.2 Handling the Failure of the Receive Power to Meet the Design Requirements...........................................................98
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data..............................................................................100 8.1 Configuration Preparations.........................................................................................................................................102 8.1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools..............................................................................................................................102 8.1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions........................................................................................................................102 8.1.3 U2000 Quick Start...................................................................................................................................................102 8.1.3.1 Logging In to a U2000 Client...............................................................................................................................103 8.1.3.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client............................................................................................................................104 8.1.3.3 Using the Help......................................................................................................................................................104 8.1.3.4 Navigating to Common Views.............................................................................................................................105 8.1.3.4.1 Navigating to Main Topology...........................................................................................................................105 8.1.3.4.2 Navigating to NE Explorer................................................................................................................................106 8.1.3.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel...............................................................................................................................107 8.2 General Configuration Process...................................................................................................................................107 8.3 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples.........................................................................................109 8.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................109 8.3.2 Microwave Chain Network.....................................................................................................................................111 8.3.3 Microwave Ring Network.......................................................................................................................................112 8.3.4 Hybrid Network Consisting of Radio Equipment and Optical Fibers.....................................................................112 8.3.5 Large-Capacity Microwave Backhaul Network Configured with 1+1 Protection..................................................113 8.3.6 Network for Transparently Transmitting CPRI Services over Microwave Signals................................................114 8.4 Configuring the Network Topology...........................................................................................................................115 8.4.1 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................115 8.4.1.1 Introduction to DCN.............................................................................................................................................115 8.4.1.2 IP DCN.................................................................................................................................................................120 8.4.1.3 Fiber/Cable Types.................................................................................................................................................124 8.4.2 Configuration Process (Network Topology)...........................................................................................................125 8.4.3 Configuration Example (Network Topology).........................................................................................................127 8.4.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................127 8.4.3.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................128 8.5 Configuring Microwave Links...................................................................................................................................133 8.5.1 Configuration Process (Microwave Links)..............................................................................................................133 8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Chain Network)..........................................................................135 8.5.2.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................135 8.5.2.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................137 8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links with 1+1 Protection)...........................................................................139 8.5.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................139 8.5.3.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................140 8.6 Configuring Ethernet Services ...................................................................................................................................144 Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
8.6.1 Port Description.......................................................................................................................................................145 8.6.2 Ethernet Service Types............................................................................................................................................146 8.6.2.1 Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service...................................................................................146 8.6.2.2 VLAN-based E-Line Service................................................................................................................................148 8.6.2.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services................................................................................................................................149 8.6.2.4 IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services.......................................................................................................152 8.6.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services.......................................................................................................153 8.6.2.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services................................................................................................................154 8.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................156 8.6.3.1 Per-NE Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services).............................157 8.6.3.2 End-to-End Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service)........................160 8.6.3.3 Per-NE Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)..........................................................................163 8.6.3.4 End-to-End Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Service).....................................................................166 8.6.3.5 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services)...................................................169 8.6.3.6 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-Based E-LAN Service).............................................172 8.6.3.7 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)...................................................175 8.6.3.8 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service).............................................178 8.6.4 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services)...........................................181 8.6.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................182 8.6.4.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Protection).................................................................183 8.6.4.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)................................................................185 8.6.4.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS).........................................................................................186 8.6.4.5 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification).................................................189 8.6.4.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................192 8.6.4.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information)...........................................................193 8.6.4.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)........................................................................................................194 8.6.4.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)..........................................................197 8.6.5 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line Services)........................................................................................198 8.6.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................198 8.6.5.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)................................................................200 8.6.5.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS).........................................................................................202 8.6.5.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification).................................................205 8.6.5.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information)...........................................................208 8.6.5.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)........................................................................................................209 8.6.5.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)..........................................................212 8.6.6 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service)..................................................................213 8.6.6.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................213 8.6.6.2 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection).......................................................................................215 8.6.6.3 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)......................................................................................216 8.6.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS)...............................................................................................................217 8.6.6.5 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification).......................................................................219 Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
8.6.6.6 End-to-EndConfiguration Procedure (Ethernet Protection).................................................................................222 8.6.6.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)...............................................................................223 8.6.6.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)........................................................................................................223 8.6.6.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)................................................................226 8.6.7 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services).................................................................227 8.6.7.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................227 8.6.7.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)................................................................229 8.6.7.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS).........................................................................................231 8.6.7.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification).................................................234 8.6.7.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)...............................................................................237 8.6.7.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)........................................................................................................238 8.6.7.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)..........................................................241 8.7 Configuring CPRI Services........................................................................................................................................242 8.7.1 Configuration Process (CPRI Services)..................................................................................................................242 8.7.2 Configuration Example (CPRI Services)................................................................................................................243 8.7.2.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................244 8.7.2.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................244 8.8 Configuring Clocks.....................................................................................................................................................245 8.8.1 Configuration Process (Configuring a Clock).........................................................................................................245 8.8.2 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Chain Network)..........................................................................247 8.8.2.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................247 8.8.2.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................248 8.8.3 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Ring Network)............................................................................250 8.8.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................250 8.8.3.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................251 8.9 Common Service Configuration Operations..............................................................................................................253 8.9.1 Configuring the Network Topology........................................................................................................................254 8.9.1.1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method.......................................................................................................254 8.9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually.....................................................................................................................................256 8.9.1.3 Changing an NE ID..............................................................................................................................................257 8.9.1.4 Changing an NE Name.........................................................................................................................................258 8.9.1.5 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN..................................................................................259 8.9.1.6 Configuring Access Control.................................................................................................................................260 8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method...........................................................................................261 8.9.1.8 Creating a Fiber/Cable Manually.........................................................................................................................262 8.9.2 Configuring Microwave Links................................................................................................................................263 8.9.2.1 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................................264 8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link...................................................................................................................266 8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)...............................................................................267 8.9.3 Configuring Ethernet Services on a Per-NE Basis..................................................................................................268 8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG....................................................................................................................................................269 Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance...................................................................................................................................272 8.9.3.3 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service.................................................................273 8.9.3.4 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service..............................................................................................................274 8.9.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service.....................................................................................275 8.9.3.6 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service.....................................................................................276 8.9.3.7 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge......................................................................................................277 8.9.3.8 Deleting an E-Line Service...................................................................................................................................278 8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service..................................................................................................................................279 8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain.........................................................................................................280 8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port.....................................................................................................281 8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port..................................................................................282 8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies.........................................................................................................283 8.9.4 Configuring Ethernet Services (in End-to-End Mode)............................................................................................284 8.9.4.1 Searching for Native Ethernet Services................................................................................................................285 8.9.4.2 Creating a Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service.................................................................286 8.9.4.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service..............................................................................................................287 8.9.4.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service.....................................................................................288 8.9.4.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service.....................................................................................290 8.9.5 Configuring CPRI Services.....................................................................................................................................291 8.9.6 Configuring Clocks..................................................................................................................................................293 8.9.6.1 Configuring the System Clock Source.................................................................................................................293 8.9.6.2 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources...........................................................................................................294
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
1
Safety Precautions
About This Chapter This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. 1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices. 1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. 1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD. 1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. 1.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries. 1.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights. 1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects. 1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
1.1 General Safety Precautions This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
All Safety Precautions To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device. The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.
Local Laws and Regulations When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and regulations.
Basic Installation Requirements The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation. l
Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.
l
Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot and maintain the device.
l
Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or change the device or parts of the device (including software).
l
The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety problems to the person in charge.
Grounding Requirements The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded. l
When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.
l
Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.
l
Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.
l
The device must be connected to the protection ground (PGND) permanently. Before operating the device, check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly grounded.
Human Safety l
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the cables. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
1 Safety Precautions
When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector. NOTE
The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.
l
To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.
l
Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt by laser beams.
l
Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches, to prevent electric shock and burn.
l
In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building again in any situation.
l
Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as on a wall or in a rack.
l
When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.
l
When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.
l
After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.
Device Safety
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment. Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 380 and their meanings. Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 380 Label
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Label Name
Description
ESD protection label
Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity.
Radiation warning label
Indicates that the equipment generates electromagnetic radiation.
High temperature warning label
Indicates that the equipment surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. Wear protective gloves to handle the equipment.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Label
1 Safety Precautions
Label Name
Description
Grounding label
Indicates the grounding position of a chassis.
1.3 Electrical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current, power cables, fuses, and ESD.
High Voltage
DANGER l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal. l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or both.
Thunderstorm The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.
DANGER Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather conditions.
High Leakage Current
CAUTION Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device cannot be ensured. If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
Power Cables
DANGER Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. l
Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.
l
Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is correct.
Device with Power On
DANGER Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.
DANGER Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.
Short Circuits When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.
Fuse
CAUTION If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to ensure safe operation of the device.
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
DANGER Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas. Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.
1.5 Storage Batteries This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
DANGER Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar with the method of connecting a storage battery. l
Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any shortcircuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.
l
If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.
l
A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit, which leads to human injuries.
Basic Precautions To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery: l
Use special insulation tools.
l
Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.
l
Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing electrolyte.
l
When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or reversing the storage battery is prohibited.
l
Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.
Short-Circuit
DANGER A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working battery before performing other operations.
Hazardous Gas
NOTICE Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device erosion. Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.
Battery Temperature
NOTICE If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may overflow. When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C, you need to check whether the electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.
Battery Leakage
NOTICE In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately. When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte: l
Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)
l
Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal. If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital immediately. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
1.6 Radiation This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers. 1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers. 1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. 1.6.3 Forbidden Areas The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. 1.6.4 Laser This topic describes safety precautions for lasers. 1.6.5 Microwave When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using optical fibers.
DANGER When installing or maintaining optical fibers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface or fiber connectors. The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.
Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces
NOTICE If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before the fiber is led into the equipment through the optical distribution frame (ODF) for being inserted into an optical interface on the equipment. The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following special cleaning tools and materials: l
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
Non-woven lens tissue
l
Special compressed gas
l
Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
l
Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent
l
Special magnifier for fiber connectors
1 Safety Precautions
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure. If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.
NOTICE Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area. l
Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range, the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.
l
A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden area.
1.6.4 Laser This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.
CAUTION When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly without eye protection. Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the eyes may be damaged. In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur, however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view an un-terminated optical fiber. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions: l
All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the required training courses.
l
Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.
l
Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.
l
Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off.
l
Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source is switched off.
l
Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not exposed to laser radiation.
l
Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.
Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers: l
Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.
l
Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.
1.6.5 Microwave When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.
CAUTION Strong radio frequency can harm the human body. When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.
1.7 Working at Heights This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
CAUTION When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
The requirements for working at heights are as follows: l
The personnel who work at heights must be trained.
l
Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling down.
l
Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.
l
Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.
l
Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are intact.
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices. 1.7.2 Using Ladders This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.
CAUTION When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects. l
Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.
l
Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good condition.
l
Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or wall with good weight-bearing capacity.
l
Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.
l
Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lifting, as shown in Figure 1-1.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
Figure 1-1 Hoisting heavy objects
1.7.2 Using Ladders This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.
Checking Ladders l
Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder is in good condition, you can use the ladder.
l
Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid overweighing the ladder.
Placing Ladders The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-2. When using a ladder, to prevent the ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
Figure 1-2 Slanting a ladder
Climbing Up a Ladder When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points: l
Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two long sides.
l
Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.
l
Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).
If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the roof, as shown in Figure 1-3. Figure 1-3 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
1.8 Mechanical Safety This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans, and carrying heavy objects.
Drilling Holes
CAUTION Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited. l
Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.
l
Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by the splashing metal scraps.
l
Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.
l
Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling, clean up the metallic scraps.
Sharp Objects
CAUTION Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured by the sharp edges of the device.
Fans l
When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.
l
When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards are damaged.
Carrying Heavy Objects Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
CAUTION l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects. l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which may hurt you. l
Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and move stably to avoid being strained.
l
When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules, and boards.
1.9 Other Precautions This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables, and routing cables.
Removing and Inserting a Board
NOTICE When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. l
Slide the board along the guide rails.
l
Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.
l
When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors, or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components.
Binding Signal Cables
NOTICE Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.
Routing Cables In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements: Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Safety Precautions
l
When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C.
l
If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, transfer them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation.
l
Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.
High Temperature
CAUTION If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the flag may exceed 70°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment, you must wear the protection gloves.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2
2 Commissioning Preparations
Commissioning Preparations
About This Chapter This chapter describes the preparations that must be made prior to commissioning equipment. The preparation process is as follows: 2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools This section lists the documents and tools to be obtained prior to equipment commissioning. 2.2 Preparing the Certificate File for NE Access from a USB Flash Drive This section describes how to prepare an RTN.CER file used for certification of NE access from a USB flash drive. The file allows you to perform site commissioning, database backup/ restoration, and software upgrades using a USB flash drive. 2.3 Preparing a USB Flash Drive Prepare a USB flash drive if it is required for commissioning. 2.4 Determining the Commissioning Method According to the scale of a microwave transmission network, commissioning engineers can use the single-hop commissioning method or system commissioning method. 2.5 Checking Commissioning Conditions Ensure that the equipment meets the requirements for site commissioning or system commissioning prior to performing any commissioning tasks.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2 Commissioning Preparations
2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools This section lists the documents and tools to be obtained prior to equipment commissioning.
Documents Obtain the following documents before equipment commissioning: l
Engineering design documents, including: – Network Plan – Engineering Design
l
Commissioning guide, including: – OptiX RTN 380 Microwave Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Tools Prepare the tools listed in Table 2-1 before equipment commissioning. Table 2-1 Tools Tool
Application Scenario
Adjustable wrench, screwdriver, telescope, interphone, hex key (delivered with antennas), multimeter, north-stabilized indicator, and received signal strength indicator (RSSI) test cable (delivered with OptiX RTN 380)
Aligning antennas
A laptop with the Web LCT installed
l Configuring site commissioning data l Checking the microwave link status and receive power l Testing adaptive modulation (AM) shifting l Checking alarms
Network management system (NMS) server
Performing system commissioning items
NOTE
For details about the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT, see the iManager U2000 Web LCT User Guide.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2 Commissioning Preparations
2.2 Preparing the Certificate File for NE Access from a USB Flash Drive This section describes how to prepare an RTN.CER file used for certification of NE access from a USB flash drive. The file allows you to perform site commissioning, database backup/ restoration, and software upgrades using a USB flash drive.
Prerequisites The NMS is available.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.
Procedure Step 1 Optional: Query the encryption algorithm used for the NE password and set related parameters accordingly.
Step 2 Access the directory for saving the USB file generation tool. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2 Commissioning Preparations
NOTE
l On the U2000, the tool is stored under D:\oss\client\client\tools\usbtool (an example). l On the Web LCT, the tool is stored under D:\WebLCT\weblct\tools\usbtool (an example).
Step 3 Run startup_usbTool.bat.
The USB File Generation Tool dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Generate a certification file for NE access from a USB flash drive. 1.
Enter the user name and password for logging in to the NE to be commissioned. NOTE
l Default user name: szhw l Default password: nesoft
2.
Select an encryption type according to the encryption algorithm used by the NE. NOTE
l The encryption type supported by the equipment is PBKDF2. l If you do not know the encryption algorithm used by the NE, select All. In this case, the certification file generated by the USB file generation tool includes three segments of ciphertexts for the password. Each segment corresponds to one algorithm from MD5, SHA256, and PBKDF2. The NE decrypts the ciphertexts according to the used encryption algorithm. l If PBKDF2 or All is selected, set SSL Certificate and Certificate File Path. SSL Certificate includes two types: Default and Custom. l If you want to use the default certificate file of the U2000, select Default. The default certificate file server.p12 is saved in the U2000 server path (such as D:\oss\server\etc\ssl\nemanager\default \keyStore\PFX\), and the default key is Changeme_123, so this file can be used only when the USB file generation tool is run on the U2000 server. If you want to use another certificate file, select Custom. l Customized certificates include two types: *.crt and *.p12. A *.p12 certificate is encrypted, so a key is required. l Both *.crt and *.p12 certificates need to be synchronized with the NE. For details, see the U2000 Administrator Guide.
3.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Click Generate File.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2 Commissioning Preparations
Step 5 Click OK in the displayed confirmation dialog box.
Step 6 Go to the directory where the RTN.CER file is stored, and copy it to the root directory of the USB flash drive. NOTE
l On the U2000, the RTN.CER file is stored under D:\oss\client\client\tools\usbtool\output (an example). l On the Web LCT, the RTN.CER file is stored under D:\WebLCT\weblct\tools\usbtool\output (an example). l Save the RTN.CER file before closing the USB file generation tool. Otherwise, the file will be automatically deleted when you close the tool.
Step 7 Click Close. ----End
2.3 Preparing a USB Flash Drive Prepare a USB flash drive if it is required for commissioning.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials USB Flash Drive The USB flash drive model recommended for OptiX RTN 380 is Locitech U208 (4 GB). If a USB flash drive of another model or capacity is required, contact the local Huawei office for confirmation. Not all USB flash drives are supported by OptiX RTN 380. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2 Commissioning Preparations
Procedure Step 1 Prepare the command script and RTN.CER file. If the NE software needs to be upgraded, prepare the required NE software package and patch package. Step 2 Format the USB flash drive into an an FAT32 file system using Windows. Then create the following directory structure on the USB flash drive. Root directory l \pkg l \patch l \script l \devtype Step 3 Copy the prepared files to the USB flash drive. Table 2-2 Content and Storage Paths on the USB Flash Drive Data
Storage Directory
NE software
\pkg NOTE Data is saved in the \pkg folder only when the NE software is upgraded. Otherwise, keep the folder empty.
Patch
\patch
Script
\script
USB authentication certificate
Root directory NOTE The RTN.CER file stores the administrator accounts and passwords. The passwords are encrypted in PBKDF2 format. This file is generated using a special-purpose tool.
Device type
\devtype
----End
2.4 Determining the Commissioning Method According to the scale of a microwave transmission network, commissioning engineers can use the single-hop commissioning method or system commissioning method.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2 Commissioning Preparations
Context NOTE
In the following instructions for both types of commissioning methods, site commissioning and system commissioning are defined as follows: l Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of one microwave link hop and the sites at both ends of the hop. Site commissioning is carried out with commissioning tools connected to the NE at a single site. l System commissioning refers to the commissioning and configuring of all NEs on a network. System commissioning is carried out with commissioning tools connected to a gateway NE.
Single-Hop Commissioning Single-hop commissioning is preferred for small-scale microwave transmission networks (for example, a network with only one or two microwave link hops). By performing single-hop commissioning, you can complete all site and system commissioning tasks at one time. The major steps are outlined as follows: 1.
On both ends of a microwave link, power on the equipment.
2.
Load commissioning data using a USB flash drive or configure commissioning data using the Web LCT.
3.
Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.
4.
Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items.
System Commissioning System commissioning is usually carried out for large-scale microwave transmission networks. The major steps are outlined as follows: 1.
Power on the equipment.
2.
Load commissioning data using a USB flash drive or configure commissioning data using the Web LCT.
3.
Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.
4.
Use the U2000 to complete the system commissioning items at the site where services converge.
2.5 Checking Commissioning Conditions Ensure that the equipment meets the requirements for site commissioning or system commissioning prior to performing any commissioning tasks. 2.5.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions Before performing site commissioning, ensure that the site and weather conditions meet the requirements for site commissioning. 2.5.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions Before performing system commissioning, ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2 Commissioning Preparations
2.5.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions Before performing site commissioning, ensure that the site and weather conditions meet the requirements for site commissioning.
Context The requirements are listed as follows: l
Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.
l
Power is available for the equipment.
l
Service signal cables have been properly routed.
l
Onsite conditions meet the requirements for antennas to work at their given heights, and the commissioning personnel are trained to work at these heights.
l
There are no adverse weather conditions (such as strong wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or affect commissioning.
2.5.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions Before performing system commissioning, ensure that the equipment and weather meet the requirements for system commissioning.
Context The requirements are listed as follows: l
Site commissioning at both ends of a microwave link has been completed.
l
Data communication network (DCN) communication on the microwave transmission network is normal.
l
There are no adverse weather conditions (such as strong wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could hinder or affect commissioning.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Commissioning Process
3
Commissioning Process
About This Chapter Based on the objects to be commissioned, commissioning involves two stages: site commissioning and system commissioning. 3.1 Site Commissioning Process (Without 1+1 Protection) Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of one radio link hop and the sites at both ends of the hop. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites work properly. Site commissioning is a preparation for system commissioning. 3.2 Site Commissioning Procedure (with 1+1 Protection) For sites configured with 1+1 protection, the commissioning procedure is different. 3.3 System Commissioning Process System commissioning refers to the commissioning of an entire microwave transmission network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protection is implemented across the network.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Commissioning Process
3.1 Site Commissioning Process (Without 1+1 Protection) Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of one radio link hop and the sites at both ends of the hop. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites work properly. Site commissioning is a preparation for system commissioning. You can use the following tools to configure site without 1+1 protection commissioning data for OptiX RTN 380: l
USB flash drive
l
Web LCT
Site Commissioning Items (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data) Engineers can configure site commissioning data using a USB flash drive onsite if they: l
Are familiar with the radio link plan for the target sites.
l
Have a USB flash drive that contains the NE commissioning data.
l
Have a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.
Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data using a USB flash drive Commissioning Item
Remarks
Powering on the Equipment
Required.
Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive
Required.
Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment
Required.
Creating NEs Using the Search Method
Required.
Checking Alarms
Required.
Aligning Single-Polarized Antennasa
Required when radio services are transmitted by singlepolarized antennas.
Checking the Radio Link Status and Receive Power
Required.
NOTE
a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data at both ends of the radio link.
Site Commissioning Items (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data) Engineers can configure site commissioning data using the Web LCT onsite if they: l
Are familiar with how to configure radio link data on OptiX RTN 380.
l
Are familiar with the radio link plan for the target sites.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
3 Commissioning Process
Have a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.
Commissioning Item
Remarks
Powering on the Equipment
Required.
Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment
Required.
Creating NEs Using the Search Method
Required.
Configuring Site Commissioning Data or Delivering a Commissioning Data Script to an NE Using the Web LCT
Required.
Checking Alarms
Required.
Aligning Single-Polarized Antennasa
Required.
Checking the Radio Link Status and Receive Power
Required.
NOTE
a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data at both ends of the radio link.
3.2 Site Commissioning Procedure (with 1+1 Protection) For sites configured with 1+1 protection, the commissioning procedure is different. NOTE
Sites configured with 1+1 protection only support configuration of commissioning data using the Web LCT, and do not support configuration of commissioning data using a USB flash drive or delivery of commissioning data scripts using the Web LCT.
Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Commissioning Data Using the Web LCT) Commissioning engineers can configure commissioning data using the Web LCT on site when: l
The commissioning engineers are familiar with the microwave link data plan for target sites.
l
The commissioning engineers have a laptop on which the Web LCT has been installed.
Site commissioning can be performed according to Figure 3-1 or Figure 3-2 depending on the number of data configuration engineers responsible for configuring 1+1 protection at both sites. NOTE
l Antenna alignment engineers align antennas, activate radio links, and turn over the subsequent commissioning to the data configuration engineers responsible for configuring 1+1 protection. l The data configuration engineers responsible for configuring 1+1 protection completes the configuration of 1+1 protection. l An engineer familiar with site commissioning can align antennas and configure 1+1 protection on himself/ herself.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Commissioning Process
Figure 3-1 Coordinately configuring 1+1 protection for sites at both ends Near-end site
Far-end site Main
Main
LAG
LAG
LAG
LAG
Web LCT
Antenna LAG
Web LCT
Antenna LAG
Standby
Standby
E-LAG Antenna alignment engineer
E-LAG
Data configuration engineer responsible for configuring 1+1 protection Active NE
1
Antenna alignment engineer Standby NE
Active NE 1
Power on the equipment.
2
2 Configure site commissioning data.
Change an NE ID.
Change an NE ID.
3
Configure NE communication parameters.
Align antennas
Check the status and receive power of the active microwave link.
Configure OSPF parameters.
6
Synchronize NE time. 7
8
Deleting an E-LAN Service or Deleting an E-Line Service
8
Configure site commissioning parameters.
Deleting an E-LAN Service or Deleting an E-Line Service
No operation
11 Check alarms.
Configure NE communication data.
8
Change an NE name.
Deleting an E-LAN Service or Deleting an E-Line Service
8
Power on the equipment. Configure site commissioning data.
Synchronize NE time. Check alarms.
12 Check the status and receive power of the microwave links.
9.2
Change an NE ID. Configure NE communication parameters.
Deleting an E-LAN Service or Deleting an E-Line Service
If an optical splitter is 9.1 used to form 1+1 Configure a LAG protection, this step does for 1+1 protection. not need to be performed.
Configure a hop of microwave link.
Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group
Required
7
Change an NE ID.
Configure OSPF parameters.
10
Optional
6
Synchronize NE time.
Configure the VLAN ID and bandwidth for inband DCN.
Configure a 1+1 protection group.
11
Check the status and receive power of the active microwave link.
Configure a hop of microwave link.
Power on the equipment.
If an optical splitter is used 9.1 to form 1+1 protection, this Configure a LAG for step does not need to be 1+1 protection. performed. 9.2
Align antennas 5
Configure OSPF parameters.
Configure a hop of microwave link.
Configure site commissioning data.
4
Configure the VLAN ID and bandwidth for inband DCN.
5
Power on the equipment.
Check alarms.
Change an NE name.
4
Change an NE name. Configure the VLAN ID and bandwidth for inband DCN.
Standby NE
3
Configure NE communication parameters.
Check alarms.
Data configuration engineer responsible for configuring 1+1 protection
Change an NE name. Configure the VLAN ID and bandwidth for inband DCN. Configure OSPF parameters.
Configure a 1+1 protection group.
Configure a hop of microwave link.
10
Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group 11
Check alarms.
11
Synchronize NE time. Check alarms.
12 Check the status and receive power of the microwave links.
For sites at both ends of a link, perform the following simultaneously: 1.
Power on the active equipment according to Powering on the Equipment and keep the standby equipment in the off status.
2.
Configure commissioning data for the active equipment according to Configuring Site Commissioning Data. At this time, do not configure the IF 1+1 protection group (or the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG).
3.
Check alarms on the active equipment according to Checking Alarms.
4.
Align single-polarized antennas according to Aligning Antennas to activate microwave links between the active equipment.
5.
Check the status and receive power of the microwave link between the active equipment according to Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power.
6.
Power on the standby equipment according to Powering on the Equipment.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Commissioning Process
7.
Configuring Commissioning Data for the standby NE and data for active IF 1+1 protection group data (and the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG).
8.
5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group.
9.
Check alarms on the active and standby equipment according to Checking Alarms.
10. Check the status and receive power of microwave links according to Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power. Figure 3-2 Independently configuring 1+1 protection for the near-end site Near-end site
Far-end site Main
Main
LAG
LAG
LAG
LAG
Web LCT
Antenna LAG
Web LCT
Antenna LAG Standby
Standby
E-LAG
E-LAG
Antenna alignment engineer
Antenna alignment engineer
Active NE 1
Standby NE
Active NE 1
Power on the equipment.
2
Change an NE ID.
Configure site commissioning data.
Configure NE communication parameters.
2
Change an NE ID. Configure NE communication parameters.
3 Check alarms.
Change an NE name.
Standby NE
Power on the equipment.
Configure site commissioning data.
3 Check alarms.
Change an NE name. 4
Configure the VLAN ID and bandwidth for inband DCN. Configure OSPF parameters.
Align antennas 5
Configure OSPF parameters.
5 Check the status and receive power of the active microwave link.
Configure a hop of microwave link.
4
Configure the VLAN ID and bandwidth for inband DCN.
Align antennas
Check the status and receive power of the active microwave link.
Configure a hop of microwave link.
Synchronize NE time.
6
Synchronize NE time.
7 The data configuration engineers responsible for configuring 1+1 protection configure the following for sites at both ends using DCN at the near end.
8
Deleting an E-LAN Service or Deleting an E-Line Service
8
Power on the equipment.
Configure site commissioning data.
Deleting an E-LAN Service or Deleting an E-Line Service
Change an NE ID. Configure NE communication parameters. Change an NE name.
If an optical splitter is used 9.1 to form 1+1 protection, this Configure a LAG step does not need to be for 1+1 protection. performed.
Configure the VLAN ID and bandwidth for inband DCN.
9.2 Configure a 1+1 protection group.
Configure OSPF parameters.
10
Lock the 1+1 protection group of the active devices to the active unit.
Configure a hop of microwave link. Synchronize NE time.
11 Change an NE ID.
13
Deleting an E-LAN Service or Deleting an E-Line Service
12 Configure site commissioning data. 13 Deleting an E-LAN Service or Deleting an E-Line Service
If an optical splitter is used 14.1 to form 1+1 protection, this Configure a LAG step does not need to be for 1+1 protection. performed.
Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group
Configure NE communication parameters. Change an NE name. Configure the VLAN ID and bandwidth for inband DCN. Configure OSPF parameters.
14.2 Configure a 1+1 protection group.
Configure a hop of microwave link.
Lock the 1+1 protection group of the active devices to the active unit.
Synchronize NE time.
15
15
Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group 16 Check alarms.
Required Optional No operation
16
Check alarms.
16 Check alarms.
17 Check the status and receive power of the microwave links.
18
18
Clear forced switchover command.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
16
17 Check the status and receive power of the microwave links.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Check alarms.
Clear forced switchover command.
29
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Commissioning Process
1.
Power on the active equipment at both ends according to Powering on the Equipment and keep the standby equipment in the off status.
2.
Configure commissioning data for the active equipment at both ends according to Configuring Site Commissioning Data. At this time, do not configure the IF 1+1 protection group (or the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG).
3.
Check alarms on the active equipment at both ends according to Checking Alarms.
4.
Align single-polarized antennas according to Aligning Antennas to activate microwave links between the active equipment.
5.
Check the status and receive power of the microwave link between the active equipment according to Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power.
6.
Power on the standby equipment on the far end according to Powering on the Equipment.
7.
Configure commissioning data for the active equipment at far end according to Configuring Site Commissioning Data. At this time, do not configure the IF 1+1 protection group (or the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG).
8.
Configure IF 1+1 protection group data for the active NE on the far end (and the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG).
9.
5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group on the far end.
10. Forcibly switch the 1+1 protection group of active NEs to the active unit according to Microwave 1+1 Protection Switching.
11. Power on the standby equipment on the near end according to Powering on the Equipment. 12. Configure commissioning data for the active equipment at near end according to Configuring Site Commissioning Data. At this time, do not configure the IF 1+1 protection group (or the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG). 13. Configure IF 1+1 protection group data for the active NE on the near end (and the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG). 14. 5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group on the near end. 15. Forcibly switch the 1+1 protection group of active NEs to work at the active unit according to Microwave 1+1 Protection Switching. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Commissioning Process
16. Check alarms on the active and standby equipment according to Checking Alarms. 17. Check the status and receive power of microwave links according to Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power. 18. Clear forced switchover commands for the main equipment at the near end and the far end according to Microwave 1+1 Protection Switching
3.3 System Commissioning Process System commissioning refers to the commissioning of an entire microwave transmission network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and protection is implemented across the network. Table 3-2 System commissioning items Commissioning Item
Remarks
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data
Required.
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services
6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis
Required when Ethernet services are configured on a per NE basis.
6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode
Required when Ethernet services are configured in end-to-end mode.
6.4 Testing AMAC Shifting
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Required.
31
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3 Commissioning Process
Commissioning Item 6.5 Testing Protection Switching
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Remarks Testing ERPS Switching
Required.
6.5.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching
Required when a microwave link with 1+1 protection is configured.
6.6 Checking the Clock Status
Required.
6.7 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link
Optional.
6.8 Testing Ethernet Service Performance
6.8.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio
Required.
6.8.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio
Required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4
4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)
Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)
About This Chapter Site commissioning using a USB flash drive is highly efficient. Prior to site commissioning using this method, ensure that configuration data stored in the USB flash drive is correct.
Context The commissioning process is as follows: 4.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380 You can verify whether the hardware system and power system are functional by observing the equipment power-on process. 4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive When you load commissioning data from a USB flash drive to an NE, the NE software is upgraded simultaneously. 4.3 Using the Web LCT to Complete Subsequent Commissioning Items The specific commissioning steps are the same as those in the scenario where the entire commissioning process is performed using the Web LCT.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)
4.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380 You can verify whether the hardware system and power system are functional by observing the equipment power-on process.
Context NOTE
l Power on the equipment within 24 hours of unpacking. l During maintenance, the power-off time of the equipment cannot be longer than 24 hours.
4.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI) This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 with an indoor PI. You can verify whether the OptiX RTN 380 and indoor PI are functional by observing the equipment poweron process. 4.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE) OptiX RTN 380 supports power supply by a Dock, the EG4P board of an IDU 900, or other power sourcing equipment (PSE). This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 to which power is supplied by a Dock. The procedure for powering on OptiX RTN 380 to which power is supplied by other PSEs is similar.
4.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI) This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 with an indoor PI. You can verify whether the OptiX RTN 380 and indoor PI are functional by observing the equipment poweron process.
Prerequisites l
Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.
l
The power supply is available. The voltage, polarity, and fuse capacity of the power supply are correct.
l
The power supply (for example, the cabinet power distribution box) is switched off.
l
Power cable connections are correct. The polarity is not reversed.
Context Table 4-1 lists the fuse capacity recommended for OptiX RTN 380. Table 4-1 Fuse capacity Chassis
Recommended Fuse Capacity
OptiX RTN 380
6A
NOTE
The fuse capacity ranges from 6 A to 12 A in practice.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Precaution
NOTICE l If the output power voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not switch on the power supply and propose corresponding rectification suggestions. l If any power cable connection is incorrect, rectify the connection before power-on. Otherwise, the circuit breaker on the power distribution box will be disconnected and even the power cable may be burnt.
Procedure Step 1 Connect to the power supply.
P&E
P&E
GE
NMS
MGMT
P&E
Step 2 Verify that the outdoor network cable and PI power cable are correctly connected. Connect the PI to the power supply and observe the PI indicators.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)
GE
NMS
MGMT
P&E
Power supply equipment Blue: -48 V Black: 0 V ground cable
(-) (+)
Normally, the DC IN and P&E OUT indicators on the PI should be steady green. NOTE
l If the DC IN indicator is steady green but the P&E OUT indicator blinks green, check whether the outdoor network cable or OptiX RTN 380 is short-circuited. l If the DC IN indicator is steady green and the P&E OUT indicator is off, check whether the outdoor network cable or PI is faulty.
Step 3 Observe the system indicator on OptiX RTN 380 to check whether the NE is successfully powered on.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)
Normally, the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 380 should be steady green. NOTE
If the system indicator is steady red, check whether the microwave link, the outdoor network cable or OptiX RTN 380 is faulty.
----End
4.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE) OptiX RTN 380 supports power supply by a Dock, the EG4P board of an IDU 900, or other power sourcing equipment (PSE). This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 to which power is supplied by a Dock. The procedure for powering on OptiX RTN 380 to which power is supplied by other PSEs is similar.
Prerequisites l
Hardware installation has been completed for an OptiX RTN 380 and has passed acceptance.
l
The Dock has been powered on and has passed acceptance.
Procedure Step 1 Use an outdoor GE network cable to connect the P&E port of the OptiX RTN 380 and the WAN port of the Dock. Power on the OptiX RTN 380.
NOTE
If a site has two OptiX RTN 380s in different directions, connect the P&E port of the other OptiX RTN 380 to the LAN1 port of the Dock. Then, power on the other OptiX RTN 380. By default, the OptiX RTN 380 whose P&E port is connected to the WAN port of the Dock traces the clock of the OptiX RTN 380 whose P&E port is connected to the LAN1 port of the Dock.
Step 2 Observe the STAT indicator on the OptiX RTN 380 to check whether it is successfully powered on. Normally, the STAT indicator on the cover of the maintenance compartment should be steady green. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)
NOTE
l If the STAT indicator on the maintenance compartment is red, check whether the outdoor GE network cable connects the P&E port of the OptiX RTN 380 and the WAN port of the Dock properly or whether the OptiX RTN 380 is running properly. l If the STAT indicator on the maintenance compartment blinks red about every 1s, check whether the microwave link is interrupted.
----End
4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive When you load commissioning data from a USB flash drive to an NE, the NE software is upgraded simultaneously.
Prerequisites l
The equipment has been powered on and is running properly. (If the equipment is powered on for the first time or if the equipment is powered off and then powered on again, wait 3 minutes before you load commissioning data using a USB flash drive.)
l
Commissioning data has been loaded to a USB flash drive.
l
The certificate file on the USB flash drive is correct.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials USB flash drive
Procedure Step 1 Power on the equipment and open the maintenance compartment. Step 2 Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port. Remove the Wi-FI module if it has been inserted into the USB port.
Step 3 Check the data loading status by observing the USB indicator. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
USB Indicator Status
Data Loading Status
Follow-up Operation
The indicator blinks green, turns off, blinks green again, and turns steady green.
Loading data is successful.
Remove the USB flash drive, connect the Wi-Fi module to the USB port, and close the maintenance compartment.
NOTE l When the indicator is blinking green, do not remove the USB flash drive. Otherwise, the data loading is interrupted. l If both script files and software package are loaded using the USB flash drive, the loading may take more than 10 minutes.
The indicator turns off after the USB flash drive is inserted into the USB port.
The USB indicator blinks red.
The USB flash drive is faulty and fails to go online. NOTE Another possible cause is that the USB flash drive is not properly inserted.
The model of the USB flash drive is incorrect, or an error occurs when the NE attempts to read/write the USB flash drive. NOTE For the USB flash drive models supported by OptiX RTN 380, see 2.3 Preparing a USB Flash Drive.
The indicator is steady red.
The loaded data is abnormal.
l Copy the commissioning data to another qualified USB flash drive. l Perform Step 2 again to load the commissioning data. l Copy the commissioning data to another USB flash drive. l Perform Step 2 again to load the commissioning data.
Handle the fault by following instructions in 7.1 Handling a Fault in Commissioning Script Loading Using a USB Flash Drive.
----End
4.3 Using the Web LCT to Complete Subsequent Commissioning Items The specific commissioning steps are the same as those in the scenario where the entire commissioning process is performed using the Web LCT.
Prerequisites l Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
The OptiX RTN 380 has been powered on. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)
Commissioning data has been downloaded from a USB flash disk to the NE.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT
Procedure Step 1 At one end of the radio link, 5.5.6 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link. Step 2 5.6 Checking Alarms. Step 3 5.7 Aligning Antennas. Step 4 5.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power. ----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
About This Chapter Site commissioning using the Web LCT requires that commissioning engineers be capable of configuring NE data.
Context The commissioning process is as follows: 5.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380 You can verify whether the hardware system and power system are functional by observing the equipment power-on process. 5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment Properly connecting the Web LCT to the equipment is a prerequisite for configuring commissioning data for the equipment. 5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning. 5.4 Delivering a Commissioning Data Script to an NE Using the Web LCT This section describes how to deliver a commissioning data script to an NE using the Web LCT. The function is available when a site commissioning data script has been prepared. With this function, onsite configuration is not required. 5.5 Configuring Site Commissioning Data During site commissioning, you do not need to configure Ethernet service data. By default, the NE creates an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service for transmitting Ethernet services. 5.6 Checking Alarms Checking alarms generated by equipment helps you to determine whether the equipment is functioning properly. 5.7 Aligning Antennas Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Antenna alignment is the most important activity in site commissioning, as antenna alignment has a direct effect on microwave link performance. 5.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power After antenna alignment, check whether the status of a microwave link is normal and whether the receive power meets requirements.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
5.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380 You can verify whether the hardware system and power system are functional by observing the equipment power-on process.
Context NOTE
l Power on the equipment within 24 hours of unpacking. l During maintenance, the power-off time of the equipment cannot be longer than 24 hours.
5.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI) This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 with an indoor PI. You can verify whether the OptiX RTN 380 and indoor PI are functional by observing the equipment poweron process. 5.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE) OptiX RTN 380 supports power supply by a Dock, the EG4P board of an IDU 900, or other power sourcing equipment (PSE). This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 to which power is supplied by a Dock. The procedure for powering on OptiX RTN 380 to which power is supplied by other PSEs is similar.
5.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI) This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 with an indoor PI. You can verify whether the OptiX RTN 380 and indoor PI are functional by observing the equipment poweron process.
Prerequisites l
Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.
l
The power supply is available. The voltage, polarity, and fuse capacity of the power supply are correct.
l
The power supply (for example, the cabinet power distribution box) is switched off.
l
Power cable connections are correct. The polarity is not reversed.
Context Table 5-1 lists the fuse capacity recommended for OptiX RTN 380. Table 5-1 Fuse capacity Chassis
Recommended Fuse Capacity
OptiX RTN 380
6A
NOTE
The fuse capacity ranges from 6 A to 12 A in practice.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Precaution
NOTICE l If the output power voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not switch on the power supply and propose corresponding rectification suggestions. l If any power cable connection is incorrect, rectify the connection before power-on. Otherwise, the circuit breaker on the power distribution box will be disconnected and even the power cable may be burnt.
Procedure Step 1 Connect to the power supply.
P&E
P&E
GE
NMS
MGMT
P&E
Step 2 Verify that the outdoor network cable and PI power cable are correctly connected. Connect the PI to the power supply and observe the PI indicators.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
GE
NMS
MGMT
P&E
Power supply equipment Blue: -48 V Black: 0 V ground cable
(-) (+)
Normally, the DC IN and P&E OUT indicators on the PI should be steady green. NOTE
l If the DC IN indicator is steady green but the P&E OUT indicator blinks green, check whether the outdoor network cable or OptiX RTN 380 is short-circuited. l If the DC IN indicator is steady green and the P&E OUT indicator is off, check whether the outdoor network cable or PI is faulty.
Step 3 Observe the system indicator on OptiX RTN 380 to check whether the NE is successfully powered on.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Normally, the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 380 should be steady green. NOTE
If the system indicator is steady red, check whether the microwave link, the outdoor network cable or OptiX RTN 380 is faulty.
----End
5.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE) OptiX RTN 380 supports power supply by a Dock, the EG4P board of an IDU 900, or other power sourcing equipment (PSE). This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 to which power is supplied by a Dock. The procedure for powering on OptiX RTN 380 to which power is supplied by other PSEs is similar.
Prerequisites l
Hardware installation has been completed for an OptiX RTN 380 and has passed acceptance.
l
The Dock has been powered on and has passed acceptance.
Procedure Step 1 Use an outdoor GE network cable to connect the P&E port of the OptiX RTN 380 and the WAN port of the Dock. Power on the OptiX RTN 380.
NOTE
If a site has two OptiX RTN 380s in different directions, connect the P&E port of the other OptiX RTN 380 to the LAN1 port of the Dock. Then, power on the other OptiX RTN 380. By default, the OptiX RTN 380 whose P&E port is connected to the WAN port of the Dock traces the clock of the OptiX RTN 380 whose P&E port is connected to the LAN1 port of the Dock.
Step 2 Observe the STAT indicator on the OptiX RTN 380 to check whether it is successfully powered on. Normally, the STAT indicator on the cover of the maintenance compartment should be steady green. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
NOTE
l If the STAT indicator on the maintenance compartment is red, check whether the outdoor GE network cable connects the P&E port of the OptiX RTN 380 and the WAN port of the Dock properly or whether the OptiX RTN 380 is running properly. l If the STAT indicator on the maintenance compartment blinks red about every 1s, check whether the microwave link is interrupted.
----End
5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment Properly connecting the Web LCT to the equipment is a prerequisite for configuring commissioning data for the equipment.
Prerequisites OptiX RTN 380s have been powered on. The Wi-Fi module is normal. NOTE
After you load commissioning data using a USB flash drive and establish the DCN, you need to connect the Web LCT to only one end of a microwave link hop. Then, the entire microwave link hop can be commissioned.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT (Win7 operating system)
Background Information This section describes how to connect the OptiX RTN 380 to the Web LCT through Wi-Fi. If the Wi-Fi module is abnormal, connect the OptiX RTN 380 to the Web LCT through the Ethernet network management interface or through the Ethernet network management interface of an NE that communicates with the OptiX RTN 380 through the DCN. The IP address of the Ethernet ports on the computer that houses the Web LCT must be in the same network segment as the NE IP address. The two IP addresses must be different.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 5-1 Ways for connecting the Web LCT to an OptiX RTN 380
P&E
Wi-Fi module
(((
RSSI/NMS
NMS/COM
4/P2
(((
Wi-Fi
EG4P
Networking with OptiX RTN 900
NOTE
l If a site has several cascaded OptiX RTN 380s, connect the laptop to only one of the OptiX RTN 380s. Other OptiX RTN 380s can be connected through the internal DCN. If the a GE electrical interface is set as the NMS interface, it can be connected to the Web LCT. l Use either a crossover cable or a straight-through cable to connect the laptop to the OptiX RTN 380. For the wire sequences of crossover cables and straight-through cables, see Cable in the OptiX RTN 380 Microwave Transmission System Product Description.
Procedure Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system. Step 2 Use the Wi-Fi Connection tool delivered with the Web LCT to set up a Wi-Fi connection between the laptop and NE. 1.
Access the Wi-Fi Connection tool directory (such as WebLCT\weblct\tools\wificonn) and run WifiConnection.exe.
2.
Select the SSID of the NE to set up a Wi-Fi connection. l The default SSID is EMn-The last six digits of a MAC address in hexadecimal format-NE ID. l Default password: Modify_123.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Right-click it. 1 2
3
4
After the connection is set up, the connection status of the related NE becomes "Connected".
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
NOTE
l If the Wi-Fi Connection tool does not find the SSID of the NE, perform the following operations: l Check whether there is a block between the laptop and the NE. l Check whether the distance between the laptop and NE is longer than the typical Wi-Fi transmission distance. (The typical transmission distance between the Wi-Fi module and laptop is 30m. An external Wi-Fi network adapter can be installed on the laptop to extend the typical transmission distance to 70 m.) l If the distance between the laptop and NE is shorter than the typical Wi-Fi transmission distance, view the status of the Wi-Fi indicator in the maintenance compartment. If the WiFi indicator is red (indicating the abnormal state), replace the Wi-Fi module or connect the laptop to the NMS port in the maintenance compartment to check the Wi-Fi configuration. l Generally, it takes about 20s to set up connection through Wi-Fi, please be patient. l If a Wi-Fi connection fails to be set up, check whether: l The connection password is correct. l The IP address is automatically allocated. l Another laptop is connected to the NE though Wi-Fi. Only one device can access an NE through Wi-Fi at a time. If another device needs to access the NE, it is recommended that you use the Wi-Fi Connection tool to disconnect the first device and then access the second device. The disconnection method is similar to the connection method.
After the Web LCT and the OptiX RTN 380 are properly connected, the indicator at the Ethernet port of the laptop is steady green. A message is displayed indicating that the network has established a local connection if the operating system has been configured to do so. Step 3 After the Wi-Fi connection is set up successfully, double-click the Start Web LCT icon on the desktop. The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.
Step 4 Set User Name, Password, and Verification Code, and click Login. l User Name: admin l Password: Changeme_123 NOTE
At the first login to the Web LCT, change the password as prompted.
If the entered user name and password are correct, the NE List page is displayed. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
----End
Follow-up Procedure If you cannot access the USER LOGIN window or the NE List page, configure the Internet Explorer using the following method:
5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.
Prerequisites l
The Web LCT is communicating properly with NEs.
l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
If the NE connection mode is SSL or Normal+SSL (default), and NEs connect to the Web LCT through Wi-Fi, NEs are accessed using the SSL protocol. If the NEs connect to the Web LCT through an Ethernet cable, it is also recommended to use the SSL protocol.
l
Follow the following steps to replace the SSL certificate if it is not matched. – Delete the WebLCT\conf\certificate directory on the Web LCT.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
– Copy the server\etc\ssl\nemanager\default directory on the U2000 to the path WebLCT \conf on the Web LCT. Rename default to certificate. Note that the installation path on the Web LCT should not contain Chinese characters, spaces, or special characters. – Restart the Web LCT.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT
Context The following procedure: l
Searches for NEs using the Search by user port method if the NEs are connected directly to the Web LCT using Wi-Fi.
l
Searches for NEs using the NE Search method if the NEs are connected directly to the Web LCT using Ethernet cables.
l
Searches for NEs using the IP auto discovery method if the site has multiple NEs, and are connected directly to the Web LCT using LAN. NOTE
The default user name for NE Login: lct. The default password for NE Login: password.
Procedure Step 1 Searches for NEs using the Search by user port method if the NEs are connected directly to the Web LCT using Wi-Fi.
Step 2 Search for NEs using the NE Search method if the NEs are connected directly to the Web LCT using Ethernet cables.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Step 3 Search for NEs using the IP auto discovery method if the site has multiple NEs.
----End
5.4 Delivering a Commissioning Data Script to an NE Using the Web LCT This section describes how to deliver a commissioning data script to an NE using the Web LCT. The function is available when a site commissioning data script has been prepared. With this function, onsite configuration is not required.
Prerequisites l
The equipment has been connected to the Web LCT.
l
The commissioning data script for the site has been prepared.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Procedure Step 1 Deliver a commissioning data script. NOTE
By default, "User Name" is "szhw" and "Password" is "nesoft".
----End
5.5 Configuring Site Commissioning Data During site commissioning, you do not need to configure Ethernet service data. By default, the NE creates an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service for transmitting Ethernet services. 5.5.1 Changing an NE ID Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. This task does not interrupt services. 5.5.2 Changing an NE Name For easier identification of an NE in Main Topology, name the NE according to its geographical location or the device to which it is connected. 5.5.3 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN The VLAN ID used by an inband data communication network (DCN) must be different from the VLAN ID used by services. The bandwidth of an inband DCN must meet the requirements of the transmission network for managing messages. 5.5.4 Deleting an E-LAN Service If 1+1 protection must be configured for links of an NE, the default E-LAN services of the NE must be deleted, to release the cascade ports occupied by the services. 5.5.5 Creating a LAG If links must be configured with 1+1 protection based on E-LAG, the access ports must be added into an E-LAG. 5.5.6 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
By performing this task, you can set the basic attributes for the local NE and the peer NE on a single hop of microwave link. 5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group This section describes how to synchronize data of an active NE to its standby NE.
5.5.1 Changing an NE ID Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. This task does not interrupt services.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT
Context The following procedure changes an NE ID to the planned value listed in the following table. Parameter
Value
New ID
320
After changing the NE ID, you need to log in to the NE again.
Procedure Step 1
----End Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
5.5.2 Changing an NE Name For easier identification of an NE in Main Topology, name the NE according to its geographical location or the device to which it is connected.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT
Context The following procedure changes an NE name to the planned value listed in the following table. Parameter
Value
Name
Site2-1
Procedure Step 1
----End
5.5.3 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN The VLAN ID used by an inband data communication network (DCN) must be different from the VLAN ID used by services. The bandwidth of an inband DCN must meet the requirements of the transmission network for managing messages.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT
Context The following procedure sets the VLAN ID and bandwidth to the planned values listed in the following table for an inband DCN. Parameter
Value
VLAN ID
4092
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
1000Kbit/s
Procedure Step 1
----End
5.5.4 Deleting an E-LAN Service If 1+1 protection must be configured for links of an NE, the default E-LAN services of the NE must be deleted, to release the cascade ports occupied by the services.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Context The following steps delete default E-LAN services of an NE.
Procedure Step 1
NOTE
Confirm the deletion in the displayed confirmation dialog box.
----End
5.5.5 Creating a LAG If links must be configured with 1+1 protection based on E-LAG, the access ports must be added into an E-LAG.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT
Context The following procedure: l
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Create a LAG for configuring 1+1 protection according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table. Parameter
NE
LAG No.
Assign Automatically (default value).
LAG Name
LAG_02
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Parameter
NE
LAG type
Static (default value)
Load sharing type
Non-load sharing (default value)
LAG priority for the main NE
32768 (default value)
Main port
GE(o)
Procedure Step 1
----End
5.5.6 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link By performing this task, you can set the basic attributes for the local NE and the peer NE on a single hop of microwave link.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
The sites at the two ends of a microwave link hop are communicating properly.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure configures basic information for the hop of microwave link. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
The planned parameter values are listed in the following table. Parameter
Link
Link ID
2
IF Channel Bandwidth
250MHz
AMAC
Disabled
Modulation Mode
16QAM
TX Frequency(MHz)
73500
T/R Spacing (MHz)
10000
ATPC
Disabled
TX power (dBm)
10
Power to Be Frequency(dBm)
-40
TX Status
unmute
Antenna Polarization
V
Procedure Step 1
----End
5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group This section describes how to synchronize data of an active NE to its standby NE.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
An IF 1+1 protection group has been created.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Background Information The following steps synchronize data from an active NE to its standby NE.
Procedure Step 1
----End
5.6 Checking Alarms Checking alarms generated by equipment helps you to determine whether the equipment is functioning properly.
Prerequisites l
The Web LCT has been connected to the equipment.
l
Basic data has been configured for the equipment.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Context The following procedure checks the alarms on an NE.
Procedure Step 1 Check alarms.
----End
5.7 Aligning Antennas Antenna alignment is the most important activity in site commissioning, as antenna alignment has a direct effect on microwave link performance. 5.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes Before aligning antennas, engineers must be familiar with the following concepts regarding the main lobe and side lobes. 5.7.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas When aligning single-polarized antennas, align the main lobes by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.
5.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes Before aligning antennas, engineers must be familiar with the following concepts regarding the main lobe and side lobes.
Definition The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differences of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are two azimuth diagrams illustrating the horizontal and vertical sections. These are the horizontal azimuth diagram and vertical azimuth diagram. Figure 5-2 is a vertical azimuth diagram showing many lobes. The lobe with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe, while the others are side lobes. The first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Figure 5-2 Main lobe and side lobes
Main lobe First side lobe Second side lobe
Locating of the Main Lobe Antenna alignment aligns the main lobe of the local antenna with the main lobe of the opposite antenna, to achieve the maximum received signal strength at the opposite antenna. The main lobe width of a microwave antenna is narrow, specifically, between 0.6° and 3.7°. For instance, in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only 0.9° when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe. Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and drop in the signal level. Whether the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal peaks. Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal peak. Figure 5-3 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe. Figure 5-3 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna 180o
90o
0o
Center of the main lobe Outer edge of the main lobe, 3 to 10 dB lower than the main lobe Trough between the main lobe and the first side lobe, 30 dB lower than the main lobe First side lobe, 20-25 dB lower than the main lobe
180o
90o
0o a Horizontal section of the antenna
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
b Head-on view
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trough between the first side lobe and the second side lobe, 30 dB or more lower than the main lobe Second side lobe, where signals are very weak
63
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Tracking Path Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are tracked on different elevations (or azimuths). Figure 5-4 shows a horizontal radio propagation model of an antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator [RSSI] port of the OptiX RTN 380). Figure 5-4 Three tracking paths Head-on view of tracking paths for different elevations
Signal level for each path 6 7
C B A
7
6
C'
5
4 1
2
C
B' 3
C'
5
4
B'
B
A'
2 1 A
3 A'
l
Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The main lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
l
Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe. The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
l
Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point 6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result, points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
When the side lobe peak on one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shown in Figure 5-5, a common error is moving the antenna from left to right along line DD', or top to bottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required to ensure that the three signal peaks of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 as shown in Figure 5-4 until the peak signal appears.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 5-5 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe E 1
D
2
1
D'
D D' 1
3
2
3
E
E'
E'
5.7.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas When aligning single-polarized antennas, align the main lobes by adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.
Prerequisites l
The preceding site commissioning items have been completed at both ends of a microwave link.
l
The weather conditions at both ends are suitable for outdoor operations, and there is no threat of rain, snow, fog or other unfavorable conditions that could interfere with the procedure.
l
Onsite conditions meet the requirements for antennas to work at their given heights, and the commissioning personnel are trained to work at these heights.
l
A properly calibrated multimeter is available.
l
The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function has been disabled (this function is disabled by default).
l
The adaptive modulation (AM) function has been disabled (this function is disabled by default).
Tools, Equipment, and Materials l
Adjustable wrench
l
Interphone
l
Hex key (delivered with antennas)
l
North-stabilized indicator
l
Telescope
l
Multimeter
l
Received signal strength indicator (RSSI) test cables (delivered with OptiX RTN 380)
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
NOTICE You can change the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the nuts or screws. For details, see the antenna installation guide. Steps provided in this section are for reference only.
Procedure Step 1 Calculate the voltage value (VBNC) for the RSSI port corresponding to the planned received signal level (RSL) based on the RSSI and RSL curves. NOTE
The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the OptiX RTN 380.
Step 2 Determine the azimuth of the antenna at the local end based on the installation position and height of the antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position. NOTE
For a special microwave link (for example, a microwave link with one end on a mountain top and the other end at the foot of the mountain), the inclination between the link and the horizontal line is greater than the half-power angle of the antenna. Slightly adjust the elevation of the antenna so the main lobes are aligned vertically.
Step 3 Connect a multimeter to the RSSI port on the OptiX RTN 380 at the local end using an RSSI test fiber and test the voltage value VBNC. Turn the multimeter to the DC power level with the voltage value 20 V. NOTE
It is recommended that you fix the multimeter to the tower with adhesive tape at your plain view, so that you can observe the RSSI voltage value while aligning antennas.
Figure 5-6 Testing the RSSI voltage using a multimeter
Step 4 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows: Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
1.
Keep the remote antenna fixed.
2.
Loosen the antenna brackets, rotate the antenna horizontally within a large range, and observe the value of VBNC on the multimeter. When the value is not 0, secure the antenna brackets.
3.
Loosen the fine adjustment bolts, rotate the antenna horizontally, and observe the peak values of VBNC on the multimeter. Normally, three signal peaks are tracked, as shown in Figure 5-7. Figure 5-7 Signal peaks 2 1
3
NOTICE If the number of tracked signal peaks is fewer than three, even after a wide rotation and careful observation of the multimeter, refer to 5.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes for help with handling the exception. 4.
Adjust the antenna azimuth until the signal strength reaches position 2 shown in Figure 5-7. When the signal strength is at position 2, the value of VBNC is the peak value.
5.
Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 until VBNC reaches the peak value within the tracked range.
6.
Secure the antenna at the local end. NOTE
When securing the antenna, ensure that VBNC remains at the peak value.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peak value, secure the antenna at the remote end. Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the remote end reach the peak value, secure the antennas at both ends. NOTE
l Perform slight adjustments in this step. l After the adjustments are complete and antennas at both ends are secured, the VBNC value must reach or exceed the VBNC value obtained in Step 1.
----End
5.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power After antenna alignment, check whether the status of a microwave link is normal and whether the receive power meets requirements. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)
Prerequisites l
Antennas have been aligned.
l
The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.
l
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT
Context The following procedure checks the microwave link status and receive power.
Procedure Step 1 Check the microwave link status and receive power.
NOTE
If the receive power does not meet design requirements, handle the fault by following instructions in 7.2 Handling the Failure of the Receive Power to Meet the Design Requirements.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
6
System Commissioning
About This Chapter This chapter describes the specific commissioning procedures for all system commissioning items. 6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data After site commissioning is performed for each hop of microwave link, data communication network (DCN) communication between NEs is normal. Then, you can connect the U2000 to an NE and configure network-wide service data. 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over microwave links. Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH OAM function, and no dedicated tester is required. 6.3 Verifying CPRI Service Configurations On OptiX RTN 380, pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) tests can be performed to verify CPRI service configurations. 6.4 Testing AMAC Shifting By simulating the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of received signals, you can determine whether to trigger AMAC shifting on OptiX RTN 380. 6.5 Testing Protection Switching If services on a microwave network are protected, you need to test typical protection schemes to verify the protection switching function. 6.6 Checking the Clock Status Checking the clock status for all NEs on a microwave transmission network ensures that the NE clocks are synchronized. 6.7 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link The fade margin over a microwave link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors (MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs). 6.8 Testing Ethernet Service Performance
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
This section describes how to test Ethernet service performance using the NE-inherent test functions.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data After site commissioning is performed for each hop of microwave link, data communication network (DCN) communication between NEs is normal. Then, you can connect the U2000 to an NE and configure network-wide service data.
Context NOTE
For details about how to configure network-wide service data, see 8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data.
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over microwave links. Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH OAM function, and no dedicated tester is required. 6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis To test Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis, you must create ETH OAM manually. 6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode The ETH OAM that is automatically created by services can be used to test Ethernet services configured in end-to-end mode.
6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis To test Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis, you must create ETH OAM manually.
Prerequisites Ethernet services have been configured. NOTE
If the Ethernet services to be tested are low-priority services, it is recommended that you perform the test when weather conditions are favorable and the microwave link works in the highest-order modulation scheme.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000
Test Connection Diagram The following procedure uses the Ethernet services from P&E on NE 1 to P&E on NE 2 as an example, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Figure 6-1 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services
Procedure Step 1 Create an MD.
Step 2 Create an MA.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Step 3 Create an MEP.
Step 4 Create a remote MEP.
Step 5 Perform an LB test. Perform an LB test by considering the MEP whose ID is 1 as the source MEP and the MEP whose ID is 2 as the sink MEP.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful. l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in the following table. Cause
Handling Procedure
Connecting to the peer end fails within the specified period.
Check whether services are interrupted.
Packets are lost.
Check whether the service traffic is higher than the transmission bandwidth. Check the link for bit errors.
----End
6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode The ETH OAM that is automatically created by services can be used to test Ethernet services configured in end-to-end mode.
Prerequisites Ethernet services have been configured. NOTE
If the Ethernet services to be tested are low-priority services, it is recommended that you perform the test when weather conditions are favorable and the microwave link works in the highest-order modulation scheme.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Test Connection Diagram The following procedure uses the Ethernet services from P&E port on NE 1 to P&E port on NE 2 as an example, as shown in Figure 6-2. Figure 6-2 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services
The following procedure: 1.
Verifies Ethernet line (E-Line) services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.
2.
Verifies Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.
Procedure Step 1 Verify E-Line services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.
Step 2 Verify E-LAN services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
----End
6.3 Verifying CPRI Service Configurations On OptiX RTN 380, pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) tests can be performed to verify CPRI service configurations.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Precautions For OptiX RTN 380, PRBS tests can be performed in the air interface direction and the CPRI port direction. The PRBS test in the air interface direction checks connectivity from the local baseband processing unit to the peer CPRI port. Figure 6-3 shows the test connection diagram and loopback location.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Figure 6-3 PRBS test in the air interface direction
The PRBS test in the CPRI port direction checks connectivity from the local baseband processing unit to the local CPRI port. Figure 6-4 shows the test connection diagram and loopback location. Figure 6-4 PRBS test in the CPRI port direction
NOTICE l During a PRBS test, the services in the tested path are unavailable. l If the NEs at both ends are connected to other devices, only a physical loopback can be performed on the CPRI port. Other types of loopback may cause the PRBS frame to be incorrectly transmitted to the downstream devices. l If the NEs at both ends are not connected to other devices, an inloop rather a physical loopback can be perform on the CPRI port.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Procedure Step 1 Perform a loopback on the CPRI port of the peer NE. For details, see Figure 6-3. Step 2 Configure a PRBS test in the air interface direction.
Step 3 Views the test result.
Step 4 Perform a loopback on the CPRI port of the local NE. For details, see Figure 6-4. Step 5 Configure a PRBS test in the CPRI port direction.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Step 6 View the test result.
----End
6.4 Testing AMAC Shifting By simulating the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of received signals, you can determine whether to trigger AMAC shifting on OptiX RTN 380.
Prerequisites l
Antennas have been aligned.
l
The adaptive modulation (AMAC) function has been enabled for the microwave link to be tested.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
6 System Commissioning
Weather conditions are favorable.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials Web LCT NOTE
The U2000 does not support this operation.
Context The following procedure tests the AMAC shifting function on an NE.
Procedure Step 1 Testing One-Touch AMAC Switching.
----End
6.5 Testing Protection Switching If services on a microwave network are protected, you need to test typical protection schemes to verify the protection switching function. 6.5.1 Testing ERPS Switching You can verify the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) function by checking the port status of the ERPS protection group before and after switching. 6.5.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching You can verify the 1+1 protection functions by checking the changes of the main and standby devices before and after switching.
6.5.1 Testing ERPS Switching You can verify the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) function by checking the port status of the ERPS protection group before and after switching. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Prerequisites l
ERPS has been configured for OptiX RTN 380s on a ring network.
l
Ethernet links on the ring network are connected correctly.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure queries the port status change on the ring protection link (RPL) owner node in an ERPS protection group before and after switching to check whether the ERPS function is running properly.
Test Connection Diagram In Figure 6-5, the Ethernet services between NE 2 and NE 6 are protected by ERPS, and NE 2 is the RPL owner node. Figure 6-5 Configuration for testing ERPS
Procedure Step 1 Before switching, query the status of the ERPS protection group that is configured on NE 2. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Step 2 Test the availability of the Ethernet services. For details, see 6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis. The value of LossRate in Detection Result should be 0. Step 3 Set TX Status to mute for NE 6.
Step 4 After switching, query the status of the ERPS protection group that is configured on NE 2.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Step 5 Test the availability of the Ethernet services. For details, see 6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis. The value of LossRate in Detection Result should be 0. Step 6 Set TX Status to unmute for NE 6.
----End
6.5.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching You can verify the 1+1 protection functions by checking the changes of the main and standby devices before and after switching.
Prerequisites l
Antenna alignment has been completed.
l
Ethernet services and 1+1 protection have been configured.
l
Static link aggregation groups (LAGs) have been configured for third-party devices,when the devices are connected without optical splitters.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000
Test Connection Diagram When the optical splitters are not used ,the basic configurations are as follows: l
Main OptiX RTN 380s: NE 11 and NE 12
l
Standby OptiX RTN 380s: NE 21 and NE 22 NOTE
The following configuration steps adopts all the 1+1 protection, and take the 1+1 HSB as an example.
Figure 6-6 Test connection diagram
The Ethernet services protected by 1+1 hot standby (HSB) between NE 11 and NE 12 shown in Figure 6-6 are tested. The same testing way can be used for the topology with optical splitters.
Procedure Step 1 Configure Reversion Mode for the 1+1 HSB protection group on NE 11. 1.
In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from Function Tree.
2.
In Protection Group, select the desired protection group and set Reversion Mode to NonRevertive.
3.
Click Apply.
4.
Click Close.
Step 2 Query the protection group status on NE 11 before switching. 1.
In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from Function Tree.
2.
In Protection Group, select the desired protection group and click Query.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3.
6 System Commissioning
Ensure that Active NE of Device in Protection Group is NE 11.
Step 3 Test availability of the tested Ethernet services before switching. For details, see 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services. The value of LossRate in Test Result should be 0. Step 4 Cold reset NE 11. 1.
Optional: Double-click the subnet to which NE 11 belongs.
2.
Double-click NE 11 in Main Topology. The NE panel is displayed.
3.
Select the MXUF4 board, right-click, and choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu. The Warning dialog box is displayed.
4.
Click OK.
Step 5 After NE 11 is cold reset (which takes about 3 minutes), query the protection group status on NE 11. 1.
In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from Function Tree.
2.
In Protection Group, select the desired protection group and click Query.
3.
Ensure that Active NE of Device in Protection Group is NE 21.
Step 6 Test availability of the tested Ethernet services after switching. For details, see 6.2 Testing Ethernet Services. The value of LossRate in Test Result should be 0, indicating that the 1+1 protection switching is successful. Step 7 Restore Reversion Mode to the original value. ----End
6.6 Checking the Clock Status Checking the clock status for all NEs on a microwave transmission network ensures that the NE clocks are synchronized.
Prerequisites l
Clock configuration has been completed.
l
The links that transmit clock signals are functioning properly.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure checks the clock status of NEs on a network. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Procedure Step 1 Check the clock status of an NE.
Step 2 Repeat Step 1 to check the clock status of the other NEs on the network. ----End
6.7 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link The fade margin over a microwave link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors (MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).
Prerequisites l
Weather conditions are favorable.
l
Antennas have been aligned, and the RSLs at both ends of the microwave link meet requirements.
l
The configured transmit power is the same as the actual transmit power.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The procedure for testing the fade margin is as follows: l
Test the mapping between RSLs and MSEs at multiple sites.
l
Calculate the RSL corresponding to the MSE demodulation threshold to determine the receiver sensitivity.
l
Subtract the receiver sensitivity from the current RSL to obtain the fade margin.
The following procedure tests the fade margin over a microwave link. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Precautions 1.
When the fade margin is being tested, all the services carried on the microwave link may be interrupted.
2.
For microwave links configured with 1+1 protection, forcibly switch services to the main link before testing the main link. Forcibly switch services to the standby link before testing the standby link.
Procedure Step 1 Disable the adaptive modulation (AM) and automatic transmit power control (ATPC) functions on the microwave link between two sites.
Step 2 Test the fade margin over the microwave link.
Step 3 Enable the AM and ATPC functions for the microwave link base on Step 1. NOTE
Restore Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to their initial values when enabling the AM function.
----End Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
6.8 Testing Ethernet Service Performance This section describes how to test Ethernet service performance using the NE-inherent test functions. 6.8.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio This section describes how to test the latency, throughput, and packet loss ratio of VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) services with different frame lengths. 6.8.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio This section describes how to test the long-term packet loss ratio of VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) services with different frame lengths.
6.8.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio This section describes how to test the latency, throughput, and packet loss ratio of VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) services with different frame lengths.
Prerequisites l
Antenna alignment has been completed.
l
The source and sink NEs of the Ethernet services have been configured with VLAN-based E-Line services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000
Context
NOTICE l The source and sink ports (test ports) of the tested Ethernet services must be Ethernet ports. During the test, all Ethernet services over the test ports are interrupted. l If the tested Ethernet services contain quality of service (QoS), OAM, link aggregation group (LAG), or other protocol data, the test results may be inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the functions before performing the test. l If the source port of the tested services carries other services, the test results may be inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the other services at the source port before performing the test.
Test Connection Diagram The Ethernet services between P&E on NE1 and P&E on NE2 shown in Figure 6-7 are tested. Both NE1 and NE2 are configured with VLAN-based E-Line services. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Figure 6-7 Test connection diagram
The Ethernet services between NE1 and NE2 carry the VLAN ID 100. NOTE
The VLAN ID of the E-Line service to be tested must be the same as the default VLAN ID of the test port. Otherwise, the source and sink NEs cannot be successfully created.
Procedure Step 1 Disable the inband DCN of the test ports. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 2 Disable the access control of the test ports. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
NOTICE This operation may cause DCN interruption. Step 3 Configure the TAG attributes for the test ports. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 4 Configure a sink NE for the test.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Step 5 Configure a source NE for the test and initiate the test.
NOTE
l The test results may deviate from the actual values, as compared with the results of a test performed using a meter. When the bandwidth of tested services is less than 70 Mbit/s, the deviation of the packet loss ratio is less than 1%. When the bandwidth of tested services is higher than or equal to 70 Mbit/s, the deviation of the packet loss ratio is less than 0.2%. If the packet loss ratio is not 0 and its deviation is within these ranges, perform the test multiple times. If the results of the multiple tests show that a few packets are lost and the packet loss ratio of services with long frames is higher than that of services with short frames, you can consider that no packet is lost. l The throughput test result of services with long frames deviates from the actual result by less than 5%. l The latency result and packet loss ratio result are the results of bidirectional services.
----End
6.8.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio This section describes how to test the long-term packet loss ratio of VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) services with different frame lengths.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Prerequisites l
Antenna alignment has been completed.
l
The source and sink NEs of the Ethernet services have been configured with VLAN-based E-Line services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000
Context
NOTICE l Do not modify data configuration during the test. l During the Ethernet service test, all Ethernet services over the test ports are interrupted. l If the tested Ethernet services contain quality of service (QoS), OAM, link aggregation group (LAG), or other protocol data, the test results may be inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the functions before performing the test. l If the source port of the tested services carries other services, the test results may be inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the other services at the source port before performing the test.
Test Connection Diagram The Ethernet services between P&E on NE1 and P&E on NE2 shown in Figure 6-8 are tested. Both NE1 and NE2 are configured with VLAN-based E-Line services. Figure 6-8 Test connection diagram
The Ethernet services between NE1 and NE2 carry the VLAN ID 100.
Procedure Step 1 Disable the inband DCN of the test ports. NE1 is used as an example: Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Step 2 Disable the access control of the test ports. NE1 is used as an example:
NOTICE This operation may cause DCN interruption. Step 3 Configure the TAG attributes for the test ports. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
Step 4 Configure a sink NE for the test.
Step 5 Configure a source NE for the test and initiate the test.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 System Commissioning
NOTE
The test results may deviate from the actual values. When the number of received packets and that of sent packets are different and the difference is less than a millionth, you can consider that no packet is lost.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7
7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment
Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment
About This Chapter This chapter describes how to handle common faults during site deployment. 7.1 Handling a Fault in Commissioning Script Loading Using a USB Flash Drive This section describes how to handle the fault that occurs when some commands fail to be loaded during the commissioning script loading using a USB flash drive. 7.2 Handling the Failure of the Receive Power to Meet the Design Requirements This section describes how to handle the fault of receive power failing to meet the design requirements.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment
7.1 Handling a Fault in Commissioning Script Loading Using a USB Flash Drive This section describes how to handle the fault that occurs when some commands fail to be loaded during the commissioning script loading using a USB flash drive.
Fault Symptom When a USB flash drive is used for loading commissioning data, the indicator on the USB flash drive is steady red after the loading is complete.
Cause Analysis Steady red indicates that some commands fail to be loaded. You can locate these commands in NE operation logs.
Procedure Step 1 Querying NE Operation Logs.
Step 2 Record Operation Object in the logs with Result being Operation Failed, and send the recorded information to the engineers responsible for generating data scripts. NOTE
If commissioning engineers are able to configure NE data on the Web LCT, they can re-configure data related to the failed commands based on the logs using the Web LCT.
Step 3 After correct scripts are generated, arrange personnel to load the commissioning data using a USB flash drive. For details, see 4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive. ----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment
7.2 Handling the Failure of the Receive Power to Meet the Design Requirements This section describes how to handle the fault of receive power failing to meet the design requirements.
Fault Symptom No hardware alarm is reported on an NE. However, the receive power is at least 3 dB less than the designed receive power, and the microwave link reports an MW_LOF alarm.
Cause Analysis No hardware alarm is reported, so the equipment is running normally. Diagnose the fault from the following aspects: l
NE configurations
l
Link transmission conditions and network plan
l
Hardware installation and antenna alignment
Procedure Step 1 Check NE configurations by browsing the configuration data of the microwave link according to 8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link. l Verify that the actual transmit and receive frequencies at both ends of the link match and meet the network plan requirements. l Verify that the channel bandwidths and modulation schemes at both ends of the link are the same and meet the network plan requirements. l Verify that the transmit power at both ends of the link meets the network plan requirements. l Verify that the adaptive modulation (AM) and automatic transmit power control (ATPC) functions are disabled during antenna alignment. Step 2 Check the link transmission conditions and network plan. l Verify that antennas are aligned under favorable weather conditions, free from the impact of rainfall, snow, or fog. l Verify the line of sight (LOS) on the microwave link based on a map and observation. l Verify that the antenna positions and directions meet the network plan requirements by using a compass. l Verify that the height difference between the antennas is within the adjustment range and that the network design parameters are correct by consulting network planning engineers. Step 3 Check hardware installation and antenna alignment. l Verify that the polarization directions of the antennas meet the network plan requirements. When an OptiX RTN 380 or hybrid coupler is being installed, the polarization directions of feed ports are the same. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment
l Verify that the main lobes of the antennas are aligned. ----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Configuring Networkwide Service Data
About This Chapter This document uses configuration examples to describe the flow and procedure for configuring the equipment. With this document, you can get familiar with the data configuration methods and complete various configuration tasks in actual application. NOTE
This document describes the service configuration on the U2000-T.
8.1 Configuration Preparations Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations. 8.2 General Configuration Process Select a proper configuration process based on the actual configuration scenarios. 8.3 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples This section provides the initial configuration examples which are based on five network scenarios and cover all operations in the general configuration process. 8.4 Configuring the Network Topology You can manage a transport network by using the U2000 only after configuring the network topology. 8.5 Configuring Microwave Links Before configuring services on a microwave link, you need to configure the microwave link. 8.6 Configuring Ethernet Services Ethernet services include Native Ethernet line (E-Line) services and Native Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services. 8.7 Configuring CPRI Services The OptiX RTN 380 supports transparent transmission of CPRI services. 8.8 Configuring Clocks To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy. 8.9 Common Service Configuration Operations Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
This section provides hyperlinks to common service configuration operations.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.1 Configuration Preparations Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations. 8.1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools Related documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data. 8.1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions Before beginning the configuration process, confirm that local conditions meet requirements. 8.1.3 U2000 Quick Start This chapter describes basic operations on the U2000 client.
8.1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools Related documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.
Documents l
Network planning documents
l
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Tools A computer where the U2000 software is installed l
A computer where the U2000 server software is installed
l
A computer where the U2000 client software is installed NOTE
For requirements and methods for installing U2000 software and hardware, see the documents that accompany the U2000.
8.1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions Before beginning the configuration process, confirm that local conditions meet requirements.
Context Ensure that the following requirements are met: l
All the NEs on the network must be powered on properly.
l
Data communication network (DCN) communication between the gateway NE and the non-gateway NEs must be normal.
l
The network communication between the U2000 server and the gateway NE must be normal.
l
The U2000 client can log in to the U2000 server and has network operator rights or higher.
l
The gateway NE must log in to the computer where the U2000 software is installed.
8.1.3 U2000 Quick Start This chapter describes basic operations on the U2000 client. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.1.3.1 Logging In to a U2000 Client The U2000 uses the client/server architecture and allows multiple clients. You can log in to the U2000 server from a U2000 client to manage OptiX RTN NEs. 8.1.3.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client Shut down a U2000 client when it will not to be used. 8.1.3.3 Using the Help The Help provides help information about the U2000. 8.1.3.4 Navigating to Common Views This section describes how to navigate to the common views of the U2000 and the functions of the views.
8.1.3.1 Logging In to a U2000 Client The U2000 uses the client/server architecture and allows multiple clients. You can log in to the U2000 server from a U2000 client to manage OptiX RTN NEs.
Prerequisites l
The U2000 system has been started on the U2000 server.
l
The IP address of the U2000 client is in the access control list (ACL) configured in the U2000 system.
l
The U2000 client is communicating with the U2000 server properly.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials U2000
Procedure Step 1
----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.1.3.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client Shut down a U2000 client when it will not to be used.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials U2000
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.1.3.3 Using the Help The Help provides help information about the U2000.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000
Procedure Step 1
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.1.3.4 Navigating to Common Views This section describes how to navigate to the common views of the U2000 and the functions of the views. 8.1.3.4.1 Navigating to Main Topology The U2000 provides the Main Topology view for network topology management. 8.1.3.4.2 Navigating to NE Explorer The U2000 provides the NE Explorer view for equipment management. The NE Explorer view consists of the function tree pane, object tree pane, and configuration pane. 8.1.3.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel NE Panel displays the boards configured on an NE. Different colors represent different board status.
8.1.3.4.1 Navigating to Main Topology The U2000 provides the Main Topology view for network topology management.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000
Procedure Step 1
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.1.3.4.2 Navigating to NE Explorer The U2000 provides the NE Explorer view for equipment management. The NE Explorer view consists of the function tree pane, object tree pane, and configuration pane.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000
Procedure Step 1
----End Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.1.3.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel NE Panel displays the boards configured on an NE. Different colors represent different board status.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000
Context The following procedure navigates to NE Panel.
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.2 General Configuration Process Select a proper configuration process based on the actual configuration scenarios.
Initial Configuration Initial configuration of a microwave network refers to initial configuration of network-wide service data using the network management system (NMS) after site commissioning is complete. Figure 8-1 shows the configuration flowchart.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-1 Flowchart for initial configuration
Start
Required Optional
Configure the network topology. Configure microwave links.
Configure Native Ethernet services.
Configure CPRI services.
Configure the clock.
End
The steps in the configuration flowchart are described in Table 8-1. Table 8-1 Initial configuration
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.4 Configuring the Network Topology
Required.
8.5 Configuring Microwave Links
Required.
8.6 Configuring Ethernet Services or Configuring CPRI Services
Required.
8.8 Configuring Clocks
Required during the configuration of Native Ethernet services.
NOTE Ethernet services and CPRI services are mutually exclusive. Therefore, configure one service at a time.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
NOTE
The configuration sequence provided in Table 8-1 is for reference only and needs to be adjusted based on actual scenarios. For detailed configuration methods based on local scenarios, see the configuration examples corresponding to 8.3 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples.
8.3 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples This section provides the initial configuration examples which are based on five network scenarios and cover all operations in the general configuration process. 8.3.1 Overview This section provides the relationships between configuration examples and various networks. 8.3.2 Microwave Chain Network A microwave chain network consists of three sites and four OptiX RTN 380s. 8.3.3 Microwave Ring Network This section describes a microwave ring network consisting of six OptiX RTN 380 devices located at three sites. 8.3.4 Hybrid Network Consisting of Radio Equipment and Optical Fibers This section describes a hybrid network consisting of radio equipment and optical fibers. In this network, a hop of large-capacity OptiX RTN 380 equipment replace optical fibers to form a ring network with OptiX optical transmission equipment. 8.3.5 Large-Capacity Microwave Backhaul Network Configured with 1+1 Protection This section describes a large-capacity microwave backhaul network consisting of four OptiX RTN 380 devices and OptiX RTN 900 equipment. The equipment forms 1+1 protection. 8.3.6 Network for Transparently Transmitting CPRI Services over Microwave Signals In this example, one microwave link hop transparently transmits one channel of 1.25 Gbit/s CPRI services.
8.3.1 Overview This section provides the relationships between configuration examples and various networks. NOTE
See the table below, √ indicates that a configuration example is provided and - indicates that no configuration example is provided.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Table 8-2 Configuration examples for different networks
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Microwa ve Chain Network
Microwa ve Ring Network
Hybrid Network Consistin g of Radio Equipme nt and Optical Fibers
LargeCapacity Microwav e Backhaul Network Configur ed with 1 +1 Protectio n
Network for Transpare ntly Transmitt ing CPRI Services over Microwav e Signals
Configure the network topology
√
-
-
-
-
Configure microwave links
√
-
-
√
-
Config ure Native Ethern et service s
Transparen tly transmitted point-topoint ELine service
-
-
√
-
-
VLANbased ELine service
√
-
-
-
-
IEEE 802.1D bridgebased ELAN service
-
√
-
-
-
IEEE 802.1Q bridgebased ELAN service
√
-
-
-
-
Configure CPRI services
-
-
-
-
√
Config ure the clock
√
-
-
-
-
Clock on a microwave chain network
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Operation
Clock on a microwave ring network
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Microwa ve Chain Network
Microwa ve Ring Network
Hybrid Network Consistin g of Radio Equipme nt and Optical Fibers
LargeCapacity Microwav e Backhaul Network Configur ed with 1 +1 Protectio n
Network for Transpare ntly Transmitt ing CPRI Services over Microwav e Signals
-
√
-
-
-
8.3.2 Microwave Chain Network A microwave chain network consists of three sites and four OptiX RTN 380s. Figure 8-2 shows the topology of the network. Ethernet services are received on NE2 and NE4 and are transmitted to the local backhaul network through NE1. Figure 8-2 Networking diagram for a microwave chain network
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.3.3 Microwave Ring Network This section describes a microwave ring network consisting of six OptiX RTN 380 devices located at three sites. Figure 8-3 shows the topology of the network. Ethernet services are received on NE6 and NE3 and are transmitted to the local backhaul network through NE5. Figure 8-3 Networking diagram for a microwave ring network
8.3.4 Hybrid Network Consisting of Radio Equipment and Optical Fibers This section describes a hybrid network consisting of radio equipment and optical fibers. In this network, a hop of large-capacity OptiX RTN 380 equipment replace optical fibers to form a ring network with OptiX optical transmission equipment. As shown in Figure 8-4, OptiX RTN 380s can provide high-bandwidth microwave links for transmitting Ethernet services on a metro optical Ethernet in areas where optical fibers are difficult to lay out.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-4 Networking diagram of a hybrid ring network consisting of radio equipment and optical fibers
8.3.5 Large-Capacity Microwave Backhaul Network Configured with 1+1 Protection This section describes a large-capacity microwave backhaul network consisting of four OptiX RTN 380 devices and OptiX RTN 900 equipment. The equipment forms 1+1 protection. As shown in Figure 8-5, the OptiX RTN 380 can provide large-capacity backhaul links for convergence nodes. In addition, it can form 1+1 protection with an OptiX RTN 900 NE to protect services on the backhaul links.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-5 Networking diagram of a large-capacity microwave backhaul network configured with 1+1 protection
8.3.6 Network for Transparently Transmitting CPRI Services over Microwave Signals In this example, one microwave link hop transparently transmits one channel of 1.25 Gbit/s CPRI services. Figure 8-6 shows the network topology for transparently transmitting CPRI services. On this network, NE1 receives one 1.25 Gbit/s CPRI service from the remote radio unit (RRU) and transparently transmits the CPRI service to NE2 over one hop of microwave link; NE2 then transmits the CPRI service to the baseband unit (BBU). In this manner, a remote RRU can also be connected to the BBU. Figure 8-6 Transparently transmitting CPRI services over microwave signals
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.4 Configuring the Network Topology You can manage a transport network by using the U2000 only after configuring the network topology. 8.4.1 Basic Concepts Before configuring the network topology, familiarize yourself with the basic concepts. 8.4.2 Configuration Process (Network Topology) This section provides the process for configuring NEs, DCNs, and fibers/cables. 8.4.3 Configuration Example (Network Topology) In this example, the default DCN solution (IP DCN solution) provided by the RTN 300 is used.
8.4.1 Basic Concepts Before configuring the network topology, familiarize yourself with the basic concepts. 8.4.1.1 Introduction to DCN Through the data communication network (DCN), the NMS communicates with transmission NEs to manage and maintain them. 8.4.1.2 IP DCN This section describes the basic knowledge about IP DCN. 8.4.1.3 Fiber/Cable Types You can obtain the clear fiber/cable connection relationship between NEs by using the fiber management function of the U2000. You can also use the U2000 to manage fibers and cables, including Ethernet fibers/cables, microwave links.
8.4.1.1 Introduction to DCN Through the data communication network (DCN), the NMS communicates with transmission NEs to manage and maintain them.
DCN Composition The DCN contains two types of node: NMS and NE. The DCN between the NMS and NEs are called external DCN. The DCN among NEs are called internal DCN. The external DCN consists of data communication devices, such as Ethernet switches and routers. The internal DCN consists of NEs that are connected using DCN channels. Unless otherwise specified, the DCN mentioned in this document refers to internal DCN.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
DCN Channel DCN channels fall into two types: outband DCN channel and inband DCN channel. l
Oubtband DCN channels do not occupy any service bandwidth. The RTN 300 supports two types of outband DCN channel: – D1 to D3 bytes in microwave frames – Channels over NMS ports
l
Inband DCN channels occupy some service bandwidth. The RTN 300 supports two types of inband DCN channel: – Some Ethernet service bandwidth of microwave links – Some Ethernet service bandwidth of Ethernet links
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
DCN Solutions The RTN 300 provides the following DCN solutions: l
IP DCN solution In the IP DCN solution, network management messages are encapsulated into IP packets. NEs forward the IP packets based on the IP addresses contained in them. This solution supports a maximum of 200 NEs and ensures high network stability. This solution is the default and preferred solution.
l
L2 DCN solution In the L2 DCN solution, network management messages are encapsulated into IP packets, which are carried by Ethernet frames. NEs forward the Ethernet frames based on the MAC
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
addresses contained in them. This solution supports a maximum of 1024 NEs. However, this solution has the risk of broadcast packet flooding and provides poor network stability.
The RTN 300 also supports the HWECC solution, which is eliminated gradually.
NE Types on the DCN Two types of NE are available on the DCN: gateway NE and non-gateway NE. Gateway NE: The application layer of the NMS directly communicates with the application layer of a gateway NE. Generally, an NE at the boundary of the internal DCN and external DCN is a gateway NE. An NE located inside a DCN can also function as a gateway NE. The NEs between the NMS and the gateway NE inside a DCN forward DCN packets at L2 or L3.
Non-gateway NE: The application layer of the NMS communications with the application layer of a non-gateway NE through the application layer of a gateway NE. The NEs between the gateway NE and non-gateway NE forward DCN packets at L2 or L3. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
DCN Flags An NE on the DCN must be configured with two DCN flags: NE ID and NE IP address. An NE ID is used for application layer communication. An NE ID contains three bytes among which the most significant byte represents the extended ID and the other two bytes represent the basic ID. For example, if the extended ID is 9 and the basic ID is 1, the NE ID is represented as 9-1.
An NE IP address is used for IP communication. By default, the NE IP address and NE ID of an NE are associated. Specifically, the last three bytes of the NE IP address correspond to the Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
three bytes of the NE ID. For example, if an NE ID is changed to 9-1, the corresponding NE IP address automatically changes to 129.9.0.1. Once an NE IP address is changed manually, the association relationship between the NE ID and NE IP address becomes ineffective.
8.4.1.2 IP DCN This section describes the basic knowledge about IP DCN.
Application of the IP DCN solution Huawei's IP DCN solution allows an NMS to manage NEs by encapsulating NMS messages in the IP protocol stack and transmitting them over DCN channels between the NEs. If a network has only RTN 300s or a combination of RTN 300s and third-party equipment supporting the IP protocol stack, using an IP DCN is recommended.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
IP DCN Protocol Stack To implement IP DCN, equipment must support the IP protocol stack. IP DCN uses the standard TCP/IP protocol stack architecture.
l
Layer 1 of the protocol stack is the physical layer, which provides data transmission channels for data terminal equipment. The RTN 300 provides the following DCN channels: – NMS port: all the bandwidth at the NMS port – DCC channel: three Huawei-defined DCC bytes in a microwave frame at a microwave port
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
– Inband DCN: a portion of Ethernet service bandwidth at an Ethernet or a microwave port l
Layer 2 is the data link layer, which provides reliable data transmission to the physical link layer. DCCs and inband DCNs use the PPP protocol to set up data links. Therefore, IP addresses of adjacent NEs do not need to be in the same IP network segment.
l
Layer 3 is the network layer, which specifies the network layer address for a network entity and provides transferring and addressing functions. NEs implement network layer functions using the IP protocol. The routes used for IP transferring can be direct routes discovered by running link layer protocols, manually configured static routes, or dynamic routes generated running the OSPF protocol. The RTN 300 provides various OSPF features. For details, see the Specifications.
l
Layer 4 is the transport layer, which provides end-to-end communication services for the upper layer. NEs support the TCP/UDP protocol.
Transferring Packets Based on the IP Protocol Stack In IP DCN, the packets are transferred in either gateway access mode or direct access mode. In gateway access mode, the packets are transferred as follows: 1.
The NMS transfers application layer packets to the gateway NE through the TCP connection.
2.
The gateway NE extracts the packets from the TCP/IP protocol stack and delivers them to the application layer.
3.
The application layer of the gateway NE queries the destination NE address of the packets. If the address does not belong to the gateway NE, the gateway NE queries the core routing table of the application layer. The gateway NE obtains the route to the destination NE and the communication protocol stack of the transit NE according to the destination NE address. Because the transit NE uses the IP protocol stack, the gateway NE transfers the packets to the transit NE through the IP protocol stack.
4.
The network layer of the transit NE queries the destination IP address of the packets. If the address does not belong to the transit NE, the transit NE queries the IP routing table to obtain the route to the destination NE and then transfers the packets.
5.
The network layer of the destination NE passes the packets to its application layer through the transport layer because the destination IP address of the packets is the same as the IP address of the destination NE. The application layer then processes the packets.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
In direct access mode, the packets are transferred in a different way. The original gateway NE acts as an ordinary transit NE, and packets are transferred at the network layer.
Traversing the L2 Network In actual networking, the RTN 300 is often connects to a third-party L2 network. In this scenario, IP DCN packets have to traverse the L2 network by enabling the access control function at RTN 300's Ethernet ports. When the third-party L2 network is located between the NMS and the network comprised of RTN 300s, the L2 network transmits Ethernet services and DCN packets between the NMS and the gateway NE. In this instance, the NMS uses the LAN switch to remove the VLAN ID carried by NMS messages and the access control function is enabled on the Ethernet port. After the access control function is enabled: l
The Ethernet port functions as an Ethernet NMS port on the gateway NE.
l
The IP address of the Ethernet port must be in the same network segment as that of the NMS IP address and in a network segment different from that of NE IP addresses.
l
The NMS communicates with the gateway NE based on the IP address of the Ethernet port.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
When the third-party L2 network is located between two networks comprised of RTN 300s, NMS messages are encapsulated as L2 services for transmission. In this instance, the access control function is enabled on the Ethernet ports of the two networks for connecting to the thirdparty L2 network and their IP addresses are in the same network segment. The third-party L2 network creates a dedicated L2VPN service for the DCN packets carrying a specific inband DCN VLAN ID.
8.4.1.3 Fiber/Cable Types You can obtain the clear fiber/cable connection relationship between NEs by using the fiber management function of the U2000. You can also use the U2000 to manage fibers and cables, including Ethernet fibers/cables, microwave links. l
Ethernet fibers/cables Ethernet fibers/cables refer to the Ethernet fiber/cable connections between Ethernet optical/electrical ports on different sets of equipment.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Microwave links Microwave links refer to the radio connections between different sets of radio equipment. That is, the microwave links indicate the connection relationship between different IF ports. NOTE
Fibers and cables are topological objects on the U2000. Therefore, operations on the fibers or cables do not affect the normal running of the NEs.
8.4.2 Configuration Process (Network Topology) This section provides the process for configuring NEs, DCNs, and fibers/cables. Figure 8-7 shows the flowchart for configuring the network topology. Figure 8-7 Flowchart for configuring the network topology
Required
Start
Optional Create an NE.
Set NE attributes.
Set the DCN .
Create fibers/cables.
End
NOTE
When the Web LCT is used for configuration, there is no need to create fibers/cables.
The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Creating NEs Table 8-3 Process of creating NEs Step
Operation
1
Creating NEs on the U2000
Remarks 8.9.1.1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method
It is recommended that you perform this operation to add one or more NEs to a large existing network on the U2000.
8.9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually
It is recommended that you perform this operation to create NEs on the U2000 in other cases.
Configuring NE Attributes Table 8-4 Process of configuring NE attributes Step
Operation
Remarks
1
8.9.1.3 Changing an NE ID
Required.
2
8.9.1.4 Changing an NE Name
Optional.
Configuring DCN Table 8-5 Process of configuring DCN
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Step
Operation
Remarks
1
8.9.1.5 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN
Required. If the VLAN ID and bandwidth planned for this inband DCN do not assume their default values (the default VLAN ID is 4094 and the default bandwidth is 512 kbit/s).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step
Operation
Remarks
2
8.9.1.6 Configuring Access Control
Optional. By default, access control is enabled for Ethernet interfaces. Perform this step if you want to modify the IP address or disable the function.
Creating Fibers/Cables Table 8-6 Process of creating fibers/cables Step
Operation
1
Creating fibers/ cables
Remarks 8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/ Cable by Using the Search Method
It is recommended that you perform this operation to create fibers/cables.
8.9.1.8 Creating a Fiber/ Cable Manually
It is recommended that you perform this operation to create fibers/cables that cannot be created using the search method (for example, when the fiber/ cable has not been connected).
8.4.3 Configuration Example (Network Topology) In this example, the default DCN solution (IP DCN solution) provided by the RTN 300 is used. 8.4.3.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. 8.4.3.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring a microwave chain network.
8.4.3.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. Figure 8-8 shows a microwave chain network configured according to the following requirements: l
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
A microwave chain network consists of three sites and four OptiX RTN 380s, which are managed by the U2000.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
l
The local backhaul network is a third-party network and cannot be managed together with the OptiX RTN equipment. NE1 is configured as the gateway NE, and it communicates with U2000s using the access control function.
l
The NEs use the D1 to D3 bytes in microwave links or partial Ethernet bandwidth in GE links for data communication network (DCN) communication that is implemented using IP.
Figure 8-8 Networking diagram for a microwave chain network
8.4.3.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring a microwave chain network.
Data Preparation Item
Value in This Example
DCN
l Use the IP DCN solution. l The default IP DCN solution is recommended. l Change the VLAN IDs of all inband DCN channels to 4094 (default) and the bandwidth to 512 kbit/s (default).
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Planning Principle
l The VLAN ID of inband DCN channels must be different from service VLAN IDs.
128
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
NE ID and NE IP address
See the following figure.
l Each NE must have a unique NE ID and IP address. l If access control is enabled for the port connected to the NMS, it is recommended to maintain the correlation between NE IP addresses and NE IDs (by not manually modifying NE IP addresses). Modifying an NE ID does not affect the correlation between the NE ID and the corresponding IP address of a non-gateway NE. If the IP address of a nongateway NE is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP address to be the planned value after the NE ID is changed. (For example, it the NE ID is NE9-22, the NE IP address is automatically changed to 129.9.0.22.)
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Gateway NE
NE1
-
Access Control
Access control is enabled on the P&E port (IP address: 10.0.0.1) of NE1. Access control is enabled for other interfaces by default and the setting is not modified.
If access control is enabled on the Ethernet port of the gateway NE, ensure that the IP address of this Ethernet port is in the same network segment as the IP address of the NMS but in a different network segment from the IP address of the gateway NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-9 Allocated IDs and IP addresses
Precautions NOTE
If the NE ID and NE name are changed during commissioning on a per-NE basis, skip the operations.
Procedure Step 1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method.
NOTE
In this example, the IP address of the P&E interface of the gateway NE has been modified to the planned value during NE commissioning.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Normally, the icons of NE1 to NE4 should be displayed on the main topology and all the NE data should be uploaded successfully. Step 2 Change an NE ID. NE1 is used as an example.
Step 3 Change an NE Name. NE1 is used as an example.
Step 4 Configuring Access Control.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 5 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method 1.
Create a microwave link on the RTN subnet using the search method. The microwave link between NE1 and NE2 is used as an example.
2.
Create an Ethernet link on the RTN subnet using the search method. The Ethernet link between NE2 and NE3 is used as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.5 Configuring Microwave Links Before configuring services on a microwave link, you need to configure the microwave link. 8.5.1 Configuration Process (Microwave Links) The core operation of configuring microwave links is managing a hop of microwave link. 8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Chain Network) This section describes how to configure 1+0 microwave links. 8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links with 1+1 Protection) This section describes how to configure a microwave link hop configured with 1+1 HSB protection.
8.5.1 Configuration Process (Microwave Links) The core operation of configuring microwave links is managing a hop of microwave link. Figure 8-10 shows the flowchart for configuring microwave links.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-10 Flowchart for configuring microwave links Microwave Links with 1+1 Protection
Required
Microwave Links on a Chain Network
Start
Start
Create a microwave 1+1 protection group.
Configure a hop of microwave link.
Configure a hop of microwave link.
Create a microwave link after it is found.
Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs
End
Optional
Create a microwave link after it is found.
End NOTE
The preceding flowcharts provide basic processes of configuring microwave links.
The steps in the flowchart are described as follows:
Configuring Microwave Links Table 8-7 Process of configuring microwave links with 1+1 HSB protection Operation Creating a microwave 1 +1 protection group
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Remarks 8.9.3.8 Deleting an E-Line Service or 8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service
Required. Ensure that the 1+1 cascade ports are not configured with services. Otherwise, 1+1 protection configuration will fail. NOTE By default, an OptiX RTN 380 creates a bridgebased E-LAN service. All ports of the OptiX RTN 380 are mounted to the bridge. The Ethernet ports that do not participate in 1+1 protection will result in a 1+1 protection configuration failure. Therefore, you must delete this E-LAN service.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Operation
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Remarks 8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
This step is ignored when an optical splitter is used and is required when no optical splitter is used. Configure a LAG on each of the main OptiX RTN 380s and each of the standby OptiX RTN 380s. The LAG has only one member port that receives and transmits Ethernet services.
8.9.2.1 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group
Required.
8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link
Required. Only the main NE needs to be configured with a microwave link.
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)
Configuration data is synchronized between the main and standby NEs.
8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method
In normal cases, Main Topology displays the previously created microwave links.
Table 8-8 Configuring microwave links with 1+0 protection Operation
Remarks
8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link
Required.
8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method
In normal cases, Main Topology displays the previously created microwave links.
8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Chain Network) This section describes how to configure 1+0 microwave links. 8.5.2.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. 8.5.2.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring microwave links on a microwave chain network.
8.5.2.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. Configure the microwave links on the chain network according to the following requirements: Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
l
Enable AMAC for all microwave links, because they carry Ethernet services.
l
Table 8-9 provides the requirements on the services from NodeB 1 and RAN 1. Table 8-9 Capacity of services from NodeB 1 and RAN 1 Service Capacity
NodeB 1
RAN 1
Capacity of high-priority Ethernet services (Mbit/s)
40
100
Capacity of low-priority Ethernet services (Mbit/s)
60
600
NOTE
High-priority services are services that require transmission guarantees. High-priority services must not be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Low-priority services are services that do not require transmission guarantees. Low-priority services can be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. The common service priorities are provided in Table 8-10.
Table 8-10 Common service priorities
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Service Type
Priority
Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet services
High
Streaming media, background, and interactive Ethernet services, for example, Internet services
Low
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-11 Networking diagram for microwave links on a chain network
8.5.2.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring microwave links on a microwave chain network.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation Figure 8-12 Microwave link configurations on a chain network
Context NOTE
l The following procedure takes configuring the link between NE1 and NE2 as an example. Configuring the link between NE3 and NE4 is similar. l The following procedure configures basic information for the hop of microwave link shown in the following figure by configuring NE1.
Procedure Step 1
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links with 1+1 Protection) This section describes how to configure a microwave link hop configured with 1+1 HSB protection. 8.5.3.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. 8.5.3.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring large-capacity backhaul microwave links with 1+1 protection.
8.5.3.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. Figure 8-13 shows a hop of important microwave link. Two OptiX RTN 380 devices are cascaded at each site for receiving two channels of GE services (from RAN 1 and RAN 2) from the OptiX RTN 900 convergence node. 1+1 HSB protection is configured to guarantee reliable transmission of the GE services. l
Enable AMAC for the microwave links.
l
Table 8-11 provides the requirements on the services from the RAN 1 and RAN 2. Table 8-11 Capacity of services from RAN 1 and RAN 2
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Service Capacity
RAN 1
RAN 2
Capacity of high-priority Ethernet services (Mbit/s)
100
100
Capacity of low-priority Ethernet services (Mbit/s)
800
800
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
NOTE
High-priority services are services that require transmission guarantees. High-priority services must not be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Low-priority services are services that do not require transmission guarantees. Low-priority services can be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. The common service priorities are provided in Table 8-12.
Table 8-12 Common service priorities Service Type
Priority
Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet services
High
Streaming media, background, and interactive Ethernet services, for example, Internet services
Low
Figure 8-13 Networking diagram for 1+1 HSB protection
8.5.3.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring large-capacity backhaul microwave links with 1+1 protection.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation Figure 8-14 Data Planning
Table 8-13 LAG plan Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Static (default value)
Configure the same aggregation type at both ends. Static aggregation is recommended.
Load sharing mode
Non-Sharing (default value)
Configure the same load sharing mode at both ends. Configure a load non-sharing LAG to provide protection.
System priority
32768 (default value)
The default value is recommended. The system priority can be set only in static aggregation.
Master ports
l LAG1: P&E
It is recommended that you set the main ports consistently for the equipment at both ends.
LAG type
l LAG2: GE(e)
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Table 8-14 1+1 HSB plan Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Service Protection Type
LAG (default value)
–
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode (default value)
In 1+1 HSB protection, you can initiate configuration synchronization only on a main NE in the working state. To ensure that the working NE is the main NE, "Revertive Mode" is recommended here.
WTR Time
600s (default value)
–
Enable Reverse Switching
Enabled (default value)
–
Service Port
l Service 1: P&E
It is recommended to set the main port consistently at both ends. A service port cannot be configured as a cascade port.
l Service 2: GE(e)
Cascade
Combo
Any GE port can function as a cascade port. Cascade port configurations must be consistent at both ends. A cascade port cannot be configured as a service port.
NOTE
The following procedure takes configuring NE1 as an example.
Procedure Step 1 Delete the default E-LAN service. NOTE
By default, an OptiX RTN 380 NE is configured with a bridge-based E-LAN service which is mounted to all ports. In this example, the COMBO port functions as a 1+1 cascade port cannot carry Ethernet services. If it carries Ethernet services, 1+1 protection cannot be created. Therefore, delete the E-LAN service before configuring E-LAN or E-Line services according to the service plan.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Configure a LAG for each Ethernet service access port on the main and standby NEs. This step explains how to configure LAG1 on NE1 and NE3.
Step 3 Create a microwave 1+1 protection group on the main and standby NEs.
Step 4 Manage a hop of microwave link. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
NOTE
The following procedure configures basic information for the hop of microwave link shown in the following figure by configuring NE1.
Step 5 Synchronize data between the main and standby NEs in the 1+1 protection group.
----End
8.6 Configuring Ethernet Services Ethernet services include Native Ethernet line (E-Line) services and Native Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services. 8.6.1 Port Description OptiX RTN 380 provides four GE ports. 8.6.2 Ethernet Service Types Native Ethernet services are classified into six types. 8.6.3 Configuration Process The service configuration process differs according to the specific service type. 8.6.4 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services) Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
This section uses a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet services according to the network plan. 8.6.5 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line Services) This section uses a VLAN-based E-Line service as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet services according to the service plan. 8.6.6 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service) This section provides an example of how to configure an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service according to the plan. 8.6.7 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services) This section uses an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet services according to the service plan.
8.6.1 Port Description OptiX RTN 380 provides four GE ports. Figure 8-15 shows the physical Ethernet ports on the OptiX RTN 380. Table 8-15 provides the logical ports and functions of the physical Ethernet ports. Figure 8-15 Ports on the OptiX RTN 380
Table 8-15 Description of ports on the OptiX RTN 380 Physical Port
Logical Port
Description
P&E
1-MXUF4-2 (P&E)
A P&E port can function as an electrical GE port.
COMBO
1-MXUF4-3 (COMBO)
A COMBO port is a versatile composite port and can be configured as a GE service port or CPRI port.
GE(o)
1-MXUF4-4(GE (o))
A GE port with an SFP module can function as an optical GE port.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Physical Port
Logical Port
Description
GE(e)
1-MXUF4-5(GE (e))
A GE(e) port can function as an electrical GE port.
8.6.2 Ethernet Service Types Native Ethernet services are classified into six types. 8.6.2.1 Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service The transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet line (E-Line) service is the basic E-Line model. Point-to-point transmission does not involve service bandwidth sharing, service isolation, or service distinguishing. Instead, Ethernet services are transparently transmitted between two service access points. 8.6.2.2 VLAN-based E-Line Service You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet line (E-Line) services, which allows the E-Line services to share one physical transmission channel. E-Line services separated in this manner are called VLAN-based E-Line services. 8.6.2.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services S-VLAN tags can be used to separate several E-Line services so that these services share one physical channel for transmission. Therefore, S-VLAN tags can separate more services than CVLAN tags. These services are called QinQ-based E-Line services. 8.6.2.4 IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services that are forwarded based only on the MAC address table are called IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services. 8.6.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services and divide an IEEE 802.1Q bridge into multiple independent switching sub-domains. E-LAN services separated in this manner are called IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services. 8.6.2.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services S-VLANs can be used to divide a bridge into sub-switching domains. Services from different users are separated when they are transmitted in different sub-switching domains. These services are called 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services.
8.6.2.1 Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service The transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet line (E-Line) service is the basic E-Line model. Point-to-point transmission does not involve service bandwidth sharing, service isolation, or service distinguishing. Instead, Ethernet services are transparently transmitted between two service access points.
Service Model Table 8-16 describes the transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service model. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Table 8-16 Transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service model Service Model
Traffic Flow
Service Direction
Encapsulation Type
Description
Model 1
PORT (source)
UNI-UNI
Null (source)
The source port transparently transmits all the received Ethernet frames to the sink port.
PORT (sink)
Null (sink)
Model 2
PORT (source)
NOTE In service model 2, ports process Ethernet frames based on their Tag attribute or QinQclass domain. Therefore, service model 2 is not a real transparent transmission model and is not recommended.
PORT (sink)
UNI-UNI
802.1Q/QINQ (source) 802.1Q/QINQ (sink)
The source port processes the incoming Ethernet frames based on their TAG attribute or QinQ-class domain, and then sends the processed Ethernet frames to the sink port. The sink port processes the Ethernet frames based on its TAG attribute, and then exports the processed Ethernet frames.
Typical Application Figure 8-16 shows the typical application of transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service model. Figure 8-16 Typical application of Transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service model NE 1
Service 1
Port 1
E-Line
NE 2 Port 2
Transmission network
Port 2
E-Line
Port 1
Service 1
In model 1, Ethernet service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, regardless of whether the Ethernet service carries an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN ID. Port 1 transparently transmits Ethernet service 1 to port 2. Port 2 transmits Ethernet service 1 to NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same as that on NE1. In model 2, Ethernet service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, regardless of whether the Ethernet service carries an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN ID. Port 1 and Port 2 process the Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes or QinQ-class domain. Then, Port 2 sends Ethernet service 1 to NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same as that on NE1.
8.6.2.2 VLAN-based E-Line Service You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet line (E-Line) services, which allows the E-Line services to share one physical transmission channel. E-Line services separated in this manner are called VLAN-based E-Line services.
Service Model Table 8-17 provides information about the VLAN-based E-Line service model. Table 8-17 VLAN-based E-Line service model Service Type
Service Flow
Service Direction
Encapsulation Type at a Port
Service Description
VLAN-based ELine service
PORT+VLAN (source)
UNI-UNI (UNI stands for user-tonetwork interface.)
IEEE 802.1Q (source)
The source port processes incoming Ethernet frames based on its tag attribute, and then sends Ethernet frames containing a specific VLAN ID to the sink port. The sink port processes the Ethernet frames based on its tag attribute, and then transmits the processed Ethernet frames.
PORT+VLAN (sink)
IEEE 802.1Q (sink)
Typical Application Figure 8-17 shows a typical application of the VLAN-based E-Line service model. Services 1, 2, 3, and 4 from four NodeBs converge through a transmission network to a radio network controller (RNC). l
Services 1, 2, 3, and 4 carry different VLAN IDs.
l
On NE 1, services 1 and 2 are received at port 2 and port 3, respectively, and forwarded through port 1. They share the same channel but are isolated by VLANs.
l
On NE 2, services 3 and 4 are received at port 2 and port 3, respectively, and forwarded through port 1. They share the same channel but are isolated by VLANs.
l
On NE 3, services 1 and 2 are received at port 2, services 3 and 4 are received at port 3, and all four services are forwarded through port 1. All the services share the same channel but are isolated by VLANs.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Ports 2 and 3 on NE 1, NE 2, and NE 3 process incoming Ethernet frames based on their tag attributes and transmit the Ethernet frames to port 1. Port 1 processes outgoing Ethernet frames based on its tag attribute. Because the services have different VLAN IDs, they can share ports 1 on NE 1, NE 2, and NE 3.
Figure 8-17 VLAN-based E-Line service model Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 VLAN ID: 200 Service 3 VLAN ID: 300 Service 4 VLAN ID: 400
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 VLAN ID: 200 Port 1 NE 3 Port 1
RNC
E-Line E-Line
NE 1 E-Line E-Line
Port 2 Port 3
Port 2
Port 3 Service 2 VLAN ID: 200 NodeB 2
Transmission Network E-Line
Port 1 Service 3 VLAN ID: 300 Service 4 VLAN ID: 400
E-Line
NodeB 1
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100
Port 2 Port 3
Service 3 NodeB 3 VLAN ID: 300
NE 2
Service 4 VLAN ID: 400 NodeB 4
8.6.2.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services S-VLAN tags can be used to separate several E-Line services so that these services share one physical channel for transmission. Therefore, S-VLAN tags can separate more services than CVLAN tags. These services are called QinQ-based E-Line services.
Service Model Table 8-18 shows the QinQ-based E-Line service models. Table 8-18 QinQ-based E-Line service models Service Model
Service Flow
Service Direction
Port Encapsulation Mode
Service Description
Model 1
PORT (source)
UNI-NNI
Null (source)
The source port adds the SVLAN tag that corresponds to the QinQ link to all the received Ethernet frames, and then transmits the Ethernet frames to the sink port to which the QinQ link is connected.
QinQ link (sink)
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
QinQ (sink)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Service Model
Service Flow
Service Direction
Port Encapsulation Mode
Service Description
Model 2
PORT (source)
UNI-NNI
802.1Q (source)
The source port processes Ethernet frames according to the Tag attribute. It adds the S-VLAN tag that corresponds to the QinQ link to all the Ethernet frames, and then transmits the Ethernet frames to the sink port where the QinQ link configured.
QinQ link (sink)
Model 3
PORT+C-VLAN list (source)
QinQ (sink)
UNI-NNI
802.1Q (source) QinQ (sink)
QinQ link (sink)
Model 4
PORT+S-VLAN list (source)
UNI-UNI
QinQ (source) QinQ (sink)
PORT+S-VLAN list (sink)
The source port processes Ethernet frames according to the Tag attribute. It adds the S-VLAN tag that corresponds to the C-VLAN to all the Ethernet frames, and then transmits the Ethernet frames to the sink port where the QinQ link configured. The source port transmits the Ethernet frames that carry a specific S-VLAN tag (corresponding to the source QinQ) to the sink port to which the sink QinQ is connected.
Typical Application Figure 8-18 shows the typical application of service model 1. Service 1 and service 2 contain tagged frames and untagged frames. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN tag to service 1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-18 Typical application of service model 1 NE 1 Port 1
NE 2
E-Line
Service 1 Service 2
E-Lin
Port 2 Strip S-VLAN Label
Transmission Network
Port 3
E-Lin
e
Add S-VLAN Label
Port 1
E-Line
Port 3
Add S-VLAN Label
Service 1 Service 2
e
Port 2
Strip S-VLAN Label
Data( 1)
S-VLAN(300)
Data(1)
S-VLAN(300)
Data(1)
Data(1)
Data(2)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
Data(2)
Figure 8-19 shows the typical application of service model 2. Service 1 and service 2 carry different unknown C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN tag to service 1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted to port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1. Figure 8-19 Typical application of service model 2 Strip S-VLAN Label
Add S-VLAN Label
C-VLAN
Data( 1)
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN
Data(1)
C-VLAN
Data(2)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN
Data(2)
NE 1 Service 1 Unknown CVLAN Service 2 Unknown CVLAN
Port 1
Port 2
NE 2
E-Line E-Lin
Port 3
Transmission Network
E-Line
Port 3
E-Lin e
e
Add S-VLAN Label
Port 1
Port 2
Service 1 Unknown CVLAN Service 2 Unknown CVLAN
Strip S-VLAN Label
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN
Data(1)
C-VLAN
Data( 1)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN
Data(2)
C-VLAN
Data(2)
Figure 8-20 shows the typical application of service model 3. Service 1 and service 2 carry different C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN tag to service 1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted to port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-20 Typical application of service model 3 Strip S-VLAN Label
Add S-VLAN Label
C-VLAN(100)
Data( 1)
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(1)
C-VLAN(200)
Data(2)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(200)
Data(2)
NE 1 Service 1 VLAN ID: 100 Service 2 VLAN ID: 200
Port 1
Port 2
NE 2
E-Line E-Lin
Transmission Network
Port 3
Port 1
E-Line
Port 3
Service 2 Port 2 VLAN ID: 200
E-Lin e
e
Add S-VLAN Label
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100
Strip S-VLAN Label
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(1)
C-VLAN(100)
Data( 1)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(200)
Data(2)
C-VLAN(200)
Data(2)
Figure 8-21 shows the typical application of service model 4. Service 1 and service 2 carry the same S-VLAN tag. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in service 1 and port 2 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in service 2 so that the service 1 and service 2 carry different S-VLAN tags. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted to port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2. NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1. Figure 8-21 Typical application of service model 4 Switching S-VLAN Label S-VLAN(100)
Data( 1)
S-VLAN(300)
Data(1)
S-VLAN(100)
Data(2)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
NE 1 Service 1 S-VLAN ID: 100
Port 1
Service 2 S-VLAN ID: 100 Port 2
E-Line
NE 2 Port 3
Transmission Network
Port 3
E-Line
E-Lin e
e E-Lin
Port 1
Service 1 S-VLAN ID: 100
Service 2 Port 2 S-VLAN ID: 100
Switching S-VLAN Label S-VLAN(300)
Data( 1)
S-VLAN(100)
Data(1)
S-VLAN(400)
Data(2)
S-VLAN(100)
Data(2)
8.6.2.4 IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services that are forwarded based only on the MAC address table are called IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.
Service Model Table 8-19 shows the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Table 8-19 IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model Service Type
Tag Type
Encapsulation Type at a Port
Logical Port Type
Learning Mode
Switching Sub-domain
IEEE 802.1D bridge-based ELAN service
TagTransparent
Null
PORT
SVL
None
Typical Application Figure 8-22 shows a typical application of the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model. Services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 converge at NE1 and then are transmitted to the radio network controller (RNC). The services do not need to be separated; therefore, an IEEE 802.1D bridge is used at NE1 to schedule services. Figure 8-22 IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model NE 2 Port 1
Port 2
NodeB 1
802.1d bridge
NE 1 Port 1
Port 2
Transmission Network
Port 3 RNC
NE 3
802.1d bridge
Port 1 Port 2
NodeB 2 802.1d bridge
8.6.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services and divide an IEEE 802.1Q bridge into multiple independent switching sub-domains. E-LAN services separated in this manner are called IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.
Service Model Table 8-20 provides information about the IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Table 8-20 IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model Service Type
Tag Type
Encapsulation Type at a Port
Logical Port Type
Learning Mode
Switching Sub-domain
IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based ELAN service
C-Aware
IEEE 802.1Q
PORT+VLAN
Independent VLAN learning (IVL)
A bridge divided into switching sub-domains by VLAN
NOTE
The maximum number of VLANs supported by the configured for all the Ethernet services is fixed to 1024. If more than 1024 VLANs are bound to a V-UNI, the logical type of the V-UNI must be PORT, and a VLAN filtering table must be created to restrict E–LAN services transmitted from the V-UNI.
Typical Application Figure 8-23 shows a typical application of the IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model. Services 1, 2, 3, and 4 from four NodeBs converge through a transmission network to a radio network controller (RNC). l
Services 1 and 2 have the same VLAN ID of 100, and services 3 and 4 have the same VLAN ID of 200.
l
Because the VLAN ID of services 1 and 2 is different from that of services 3 and 4, IEEE 802.1Q bridges are configured: one each for NE 1, NE 2, and NE 3. The bridges are divided into switching sub-domains by VLAN for service isolation over each bridge.
Figure 8-23 IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model NE 2 VLAN 100
NodeB 1
Service 1, 2 VLAN ID: 100 Service 3, 4 VLAN ID: 200 Port 1
Service 1 VLAN ID: 100
Port 2
Port 1
NE 1 VLAN 100
VLAN 200
Port 3
RNC 802.1q bridge
Port 3
Port 2 Domain 1 (VLAN ID: 100)
802.1q bridge
Transmission Network NE NE 3 VLAN 200 2 Port 2
Port 1 Domain 2 (VLAN ID: 200)
Service 2 VLAN ID: 100 NodeB 2
NodeB 3
Service 3 VLAN ID: 200
Port 3
802.1q bridge
NodeB 4
Service 4 VLAN ID: 200
8.6.2.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services S-VLANs can be used to divide a bridge into sub-switching domains. Services from different users are separated when they are transmitted in different sub-switching domains. These services are called 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Service Model Table 8-21 shows the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model. Table 8-21 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model Service Model
TAG Attribute
Learning Mode
Sub-switching Domain
Logical Port Type
Encapsulation Mode at a Port
802.1ad bridgebased E-LAN service
S-Aware
IVL
A bridge is divided into subswitching domains based on S-VLAN tags.
PORT (UNI port)
Null or 802.1Q
PORT+CVLAN list (UNI port)
802.1Q
PORT+SVLAN list (NNI port)
QinQ
NOTE
The maximum number of VLANs supported by the configured for all the Ethernet services is fixed to 1024. If more than 1024 VLANs are bound to a V-UNI, the logical type of the V-UNI must be PORT, and a VLAN filtering table must be created to restrict E–LAN services transmitted from the V-UNI.
Typical Application Figure 8-24 shows the typical application of the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model. NE2 and N3 receive services G and H and send them to the convergence node NE1. Services G and H carry a same C-VLAN tag, so S-VLAN tags are added for differentiating and separating these services.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-24 Typical application of the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model NE 2 Add S-VLAN tag
Strip S-VLAN tag
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(G)
C-VLAN(100)
Data( G)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
NE 2 SVLAN 300
Port 1 User G2 CVLAN 100
Port 3 SVLAN 400
NE 1 Transmission Network
SVLAN 300
Port 1 User G1
CVLAN 100
Port 3
802.1ad bridge
CVLAN 100 SVLAN 400
User H1
Port 2 User H2
NE 3
Port 2
CVLAN 100
Port 4 802.1ad bridge
SVLAN 300
Transmission Network
Port 1 User G3 CVLAN 100 SVLAN 400
Port 3
NE 1
Port 2 User H3 CVLAN 100
Add S-VLAN tag
Strip S-VLAN tag C-VLAN(100)
Data( G)
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(G)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
802.1ad bridge NE 3
Add S-VLAN tag
Strip S-VLAN tag
S-VLAN(300)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(G)
C-VLAN(100)
Data( G)
S-VLAN(400)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
C-VLAN(100)
Data(H)
NOTE
You can also configure 8.6.2.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for service access.
8.6.3 Configuration Process The service configuration process differs according to the specific service type. 8.6.3.1 Per-NE Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services) This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service (QoS) information of a transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet service (E-Line) and the process of verifying the service configurations. 8.6.3.2 End-to-End Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service) This section describes the process of configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point ELine service in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-Line service information and QoS and verifying service configurations. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.6.3.3 Per-NE Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services) This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service (QoS) information for a VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) service and the process of verifying the service configurations. 8.6.3.4 End-to-End Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Service) This section describes the process of configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service in an end-toend manner. The process includes configuring E-Line service information and QoS and verifying service configurations. 8.6.3.5 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services) This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service (QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service and the process of verifying the service configurations. 8.6.3.6 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-Based E-LAN Service) This section describes the process of configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-LAN service information and QoS and verifying service configurations. 8.6.3.7 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services) This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service (QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service and the process of verifying the service configurations. 8.6.3.8 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service) This section describes the process of configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-LAN service information and QoS and verifying service configurations.
8.6.3.1 Per-NE Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point ELine Services) This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service (QoS) information of a transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet service (E-Line) and the process of verifying the service configurations.
Flowchart Figure 8-25 shows the flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-25 Flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services
Required
Start
Optional Delete an E-LAN Service
Configure LAGs.
Configure E-Line services.
Configure QoS.
Verify Ethernet services. Synchronize 1+1 configurations.
End
The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:
Deleting an E-LAN Service Table 8-22 Process of deleting an E-LAN Service
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service
Required when an NE is being initially configured. NOTE Because an OptiX RTN 380 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you need to delete the default services manually before you configure transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services on it.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Configuring LAGs Table 8-23 Process of configuring LAGs Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.
Configuring Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services Table 8-24 Process of configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.3 Creating a Point-toPoint Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service
Required.
Configuring QoS Table 8-25 Process of configuring QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain
Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port
Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the DiffServ domain.
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port
If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies
Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP +WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations Table 8-26 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations Operation
Remarks
Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis
The connectivity of Ethernet services is verified using an Ethernet OAM test.
Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations Table 8-27 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations Operation
Remarks
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)
Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services, perform this operation to synchronize service configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.
8.6.3.2 End-to-End Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-toPoint E-Line Service) This section describes the process of configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point ELine service in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-Line service information and QoS and verifying service configurations.
Flowchart Figure 8-26 shows the flowchart for configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point ELine service.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-26 Flowchart for configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service
Required
Start
Optional Delete an E-LAN Service
Configure LAGs.
Configure E-Line services.
Configure QoS.
Verify Ethernet services. Synchronize 1+1 configurations.
End
The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.
Deleting the Existing E-LAN Service Table 8-28 Process of deleting the existing E-LAN service
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service
Required when an NE is being initially configured. NOTE By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is configured on the OptiX RTN 380. Therefore, you need to delete the E-LAN service before configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Configuring LAGs Table 8-29 Process of configuring LAGs Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.
Configuring a Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service Table 8-30 Process of configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service Operation
Remarks
8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method
Optical. Perform this operation to create microwave links or Ethernet fibers/cables for the service path if they have not been created on the topology of the U2000.
8.9.4.2 Creating a Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service
Required.
Configuring QoS Table 8-31 Process of configuring QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain
Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port
Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the DiffServ domain.
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port
If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies
Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP +WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Verifying Service Configurations Table 8-32 Process of verifying the service configurations Operation
Remarks
8.6.4.9 End-toEnd Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations )
Perform an Ethernet OAM test to verify the connectivity of the Ethernet service.
Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations Table 8-33 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations Operation
Remarks
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)
Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services, perform this operation to synchronize service configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.
8.6.3.3 Per-NE Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services) This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service (QoS) information for a VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) service and the process of verifying the service configurations.
Flowchart Figure 8-27 shows the flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-27 Flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services
Required
Start
Optional Delete an E-LAN Service
Configure LAGs.
Configure E-Line services.
Configure QoS.
Verify Ethernet services. Synchronize 1+1 configurations.
End
The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:
Deleting an E-LAN Service Table 8-34 Process of deleting an E-LAN Service
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service
Required when an NE is being initially configured. NOTE Because an OptiX RTN 380 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you need to delete the default services manually before you configure transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services on it.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Configuring LAGs Table 8-35 Process of configuring LAGs Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.
Configuring VLAN-based E-Line Services Table 8-36 Process of configuring VLAN-based E-Line services Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service
Required when an NE is being initially configured.
8.9.3.4 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service
Required.
NOTE Because an OptiX RTN 380 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you need to delete the default services manually before you configure VLAN-based E-Line services on it.
Configuring QoS Table 8-37 Process of configuring QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain
Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port
Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the DiffServ domain.
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port
If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies
Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP +WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations Table 8-38 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations Operation
Remarks
Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis
The connectivity of Ethernet services is verified using an Ethernet OAM test.
Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations Table 8-39 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations Operation
Remarks
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)
Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services, perform this operation to synchronize service configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.
8.6.3.4 End-to-End Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Service) This section describes the process of configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service in an end-toend manner. The process includes configuring E-Line service information and QoS and verifying service configurations.
Flowchart Figure 8-28 shows the flowchart for configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-28 Flowchart for configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service
Required
Start
Optional Delete an E-LAN Service
Configure LAGs.
Configure E-Line services.
Configure QoS.
Verify Ethernet services. Synchronize 1+1 configurations.
End
The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.
Deleting the Existing E-LAN Service Table 8-40 Process of deleting the existing E-LAN service
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service
Required when an NE is being initially configured. NOTE By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is configured on the OptiX RTN 380. Therefore, you need to delete the E-LAN service before configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Configuring LAGs Table 8-41 Process of configuring LAGs Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.
Configuring a VLAN-based E-Line Service Table 8-42 Process of configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service Operation
Remarks
8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method
Perform this operation to create microwave links or Ethernet fibers/cables for the service path if they have not been created on the topology of the U2000.
8.9.4.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service
Required.
Configuring QoS Table 8-43 Process of configuring QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain
Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port
Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the DiffServ domain.
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port
If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies
Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP +WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Verifying Service Configurations Table 8-44 Process of verifying the service configurations Operation
Remarks
8.6.5.7 End-toEnd Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations )
Perform an Ethernet OAM test to verify the connectivity of the Ethernet service.
Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations Table 8-45 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations Operation
Remarks
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)
Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services, perform this operation to synchronize service configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.
8.6.3.5 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services) This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service (QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service and the process of verifying the service configurations.
Flowchart Figure 8-29 shows the flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-29 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services
Start
Required
Change the ports mounted with E-LAN services.
Optional Configure Ethernet Protection
Configure E-LAN services.
Configure QoS.
Verify Ethernet services.
Synchronize 1+1 configurations.
End
The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:
Removing the Ports Mounted with E-LAN Services Table 8-46 Process of removing the ports mounted with E-LAN services
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.7 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge
Optional. This operation removes the ports to be created as slave ports of LAGs from the ports that the system configures by default as ports mounted with E-LAN services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Configuring Ethernet Protection Table 8-47 Process of configuring ethernet protection Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.
8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance
Required.
Configuring IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services Table 8-48 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based ELAN Service
Optional. NOTE IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services are configured for the OptiX RTN 380 by default. This step is required only when IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services need to be reconfigured for the OptiX RTN 380.
Configuring QoS Table 8-49 Process of configuring QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain
Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port
Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the DiffServ domain.
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port
If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies
Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP +WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations Table 8-50 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations Operation
Remarks
Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis
The connectivity of Ethernet services is verified using an Ethernet OAM test.
Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations Table 8-51 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations Operation
Remarks
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)
Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services, perform this operation to synchronize service configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.
8.6.3.6 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-Based E-LAN Service) This section describes the process of configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-LAN service information and QoS and verifying service configurations.
Flowchart Figure 8-30 shows the flowchart for configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-30 Flowchart for configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service
Start
Required
Change the ports mounted with E-LAN services.
Optional Configure Ethernet Protection
Configure E-LAN services.
Configure QoS.
Verify Ethernet services.
Synchronize 1+1 configurations.
End
The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.
Changing the Ports Mounted with E-LAN Services Table 8-52 Process of changing the Ports Mounted with E-LAN Services
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.7 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge
Optional. This operation removes the ports to be created as slave ports of LAGs from the ports that the system configures by default as ports mounted with E-LAN services.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Configuring Ethernet Protection Table 8-53 Process of configuring ethernet protection Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.
8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance
Required when Ethernet services need to use ERPS.
Configuring an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service Table 8-54 Process of configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service Operation
Remarks
8.9.4.1 Searching for Native Ethernet Services
Required.
8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method
Perform this operation to create microwave links or Ethernet fibers/cables for the service path if they have not been created on the topology of the U2000.
8.9.4.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service
Optional.
NOTE IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services are configured for the OptiX RTN 380 by default. This step is required only when IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services need to be reconfigured for the OptiX RTN 380.
If the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service configured by default is deleted, perform this operation to configure a new IEEE 802.1D bridgebased E-LAN service in an end-to-end manner.
Configuring QoS Table 8-55 Process of configuring QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain
Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port
Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the DiffServ domain.
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port
If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies
Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP +WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Verifying Service Configurations Table 8-56 Process of verifying the service configurations Operation
Remarks
8.6.6.9 End-toEnd Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)
Perform an Ethernet OAM test to verify the connectivity of the Ethernet service.
Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations Table 8-57 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations Operation
Remarks
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)
Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services, perform this operation to synchronize service configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.
8.6.3.7 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services) This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service (QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service and the process of verifying the service configurations. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Flowchart Figure 8-31 shows the flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services. Figure 8-31 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services
Required
Start
Optional Delete an E-LAN Service Configure Ethernet Protection Configure E-LAN services.
Configure QoS.
Verify Ethernet services. Synchronize 1+1 configurations.
End
The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Deleting an E-LAN Service Table 8-58 Process of deleting an E-LAN Service Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service
Required when an NE is being initially configured. NOTE Because an OptiX RTN 380 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you need to delete the default services manually before you configure transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services on it.
Configuring Ethernet Protection Table 8-59 Process of configuring ethernet protection Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.
8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance
Required.
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services Table 8-60 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.6 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridgebased E-LAN Service
Required.
Configuring QoS Table 8-61 Process of configuring QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain
Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port
Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the DiffServ domain.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port
If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies
Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP +WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations Table 8-62 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations Operation
Remarks
Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis
The connectivity of Ethernet services is verified using an Ethernet OAM test.
Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations Table 8-63 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations Operation
Remarks
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)
Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services, perform this operation to synchronize service configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.
8.6.3.8 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service) This section describes the process of configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-LAN service information and QoS and verifying service configurations.
Flowchart Figure 8-32 shows the flowchart for configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-32 Flowchart for configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service
Required
Start
Optional Delete an E-LAN Service Configure Ethernet Protection Configure E-LAN services.
Configure QoS.
Verify Ethernet services. Synchronize 1+1 configurations.
End
The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.
Deleting the Existing E-LAN Service Table 8-64 Process of deleting the existing E-LAN service
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service
Required when an NE is being initially configured. NOTE By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is configured on the OptiX RTN 380. Therefore, you need to delete the E-LAN service before configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Configuring Ethernet Protection Table 8-65 Process of configuring ethernet protection Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.
8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance
Required when Ethernet services need to use ERPS.
Configuring an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service Table 8-66 Process of configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service Operation
Remarks
8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method
Perform this operation to create microwave links or Ethernet fibers/cables for the service path if they have not been created on the topology of the U2000.
8.9.4.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service
Required. Set parameters according to the service plan and parameter plan.
Configuring QoS Table 8-67 Process of configuring QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain
Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port
Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the DiffServ domain.
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port
If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Operation
Remarks
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies
Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP +WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues are SP queues.
Verifying Service Configurations Table 8-68 Process of verifying the service configurations Operation
Remarks
8.6.7.7 End-toEnd Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations )
Perform an Ethernet OAM test to verify the connectivity of the Ethernet service.
Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations Table 8-69 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations Operation
Remarks
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)
Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services, perform this operation to synchronize service configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.
8.6.4 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted Point-toPoint E-Line Services) This section uses a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet services according to the network plan. 8.6.4.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. 8.6.4.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Protection) Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection. 8.6.4.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information. 8.6.4.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS). 8.6.4.5 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations. 8.6.4.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection. 8.6.4.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet service information. 8.6.4.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS). 8.6.4.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations) This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.
8.6.4.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. As shown in Figure 8-33, a hop of large-capacity OptiX RTN 380 equipment replace optical fibers to form a ring network with OptiX optical transmission equipment. Configure Ethernet services according to the following requirements: Table 8-70 Service requirements
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Requirement Description
Requirement Satisfaction
Servic e access capaci ty
The Ethernet service capacity on a ring network does not exceed 3 Gbit/s. Microwave links need to transparently transmit Ethernet services.
Servic e protec tion
l NE 1 and NE 2 provide three GE ports (two optical ports and one electrical port) for receiving Ethernet services, configuring a load sharing link aggregation group (LAG), and configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services.
Links between the OptiX optical l NE91 and NE92 each provides three GE ports transmission equipment and the (two optical ports and one electrical port) that OptiX RTN 380 equipment work in auto-negotiation mode. A loadneed protection. sharing LAG is configured for the ports, with the electrical GE ports as the main ports.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Requirement Description
Requirement Satisfaction
QoS
Configure DiffServ and perform service scheduling and forwarding based on DSCP values.
The priorities of Ethernet services transmitted over a microwave network are identified by DSCP values. All the NEs on the microwave network have the same mapping between PHBs and DSCP values for Ethernet services.
Figure 8-33 Networking diagram for transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services
NOTE
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-MXUF4-1(IF).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-MXUF4-2(P&E).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port is 1-MXUF4-3(COMBO).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a GE optical interface is 1-MXUF4-4(GE(o)).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a GE electrical interface is 1-MXUF4-5(GE(e)).
8.6.4.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Protection) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation Table 8-71 LAG plan Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Static (default value)
Configure the same aggregation type at both ends. Static aggregation is recommended.
Load sharing mode
Sharing
Configure the same load sharing mode at both ends. Configure a load non-sharing LAG to provide protection, and a load sharing LAG to increase bandwidth.
System priority
32768 (default value)
The default value is recommended. The system priority can be set only in static aggregation.
Master and slave ports
l Master port: P&E
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports consistently for the equipment at both ends.
LAG type
l Slave port: COMBO and GE(o) Minimum number of active links
2
To trigger switching upon failure of a member link in a LAG when LAG exists with other types of protection, set the minimum number of active links to the total number of links in the LAG. Otherwise, retain the default value of 1.
Procedure Step 1 Delete an E-LAN Service.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Create a LAG.
----End
8.6.4.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
Data Preparation
Procedure Step 1 Create a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service. NE1 is used as an example. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.4.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
Data Preparation Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Mapping between DSCP values, PHBs, and queue scheduling modes
See the following figure.
l DiffServ configuration should be the same for each service port. l If the type of packets trusted by service ports is DSCP, enabling DSCP demapping function for egress ports of a DS domain is not required, as the DSCP demapping function may change DSCP values.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.4.5 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
Data Preparation NOTE
This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1 and NE2.
Procedure Step 1 Create an MD.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Create an MA.
Step 3 Create an MEP.
Step 4 Create a remote MEP.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 5 LB test. Perform an LB test by considering the MP whose ID is 1 as the source MP and the MP whose ID is 2 as the sink MP.
l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful. l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in the following table. Cause
Handling Procedure
Connecting to the peer end fails within the specified period.
Check whether services are interrupted.
Packets are lost.
Check whether the service traffic is higher than the transmission bandwidth. Check the link for bit errors.
----End Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.6.4.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.
Data Preparation Table 8-72 LAG plan Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
LAG type
Static (default value)
Configure the same aggregation type at both ends. Static aggregation is recommended.
Load sharing mode
Sharing
Configure the same load sharing mode at both ends. Configure a load non-sharing LAG to provide protection, and a load sharing LAG to increase bandwidth.
System priority
32768 (default value)
The default value is recommended. The system priority can be set only in static aggregation.
Master and slave ports
l Master port: P&E
It is recommended that you set the main and slave ports consistently for the equipment at both ends.
l Slave port: COMBO and GE(o) Minimum number of active links
2
To trigger switching upon failure of a member link in a LAG when LAG exists with other types of protection, set the minimum number of active links to the total number of links in the LAG. Otherwise, retain the default value of 1.
Procedure Step 1 Delete the E-LAN service. NE1 is used as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Configure a LAG.
----End
8.6.4.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet service information.
Data Preparation Data
Value in This Example
Planning Guidelines
Service information
l Service name: NE1toNE2
l Set names for E-Line services according to the network plan.
l Source: NE1 (P&E) l Sink: NE2 (P&E)
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
l Leave the VLAN IDs empty for the source and sink NEs of transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services. 193
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data
Value in This Example
Planning Guidelines
Port information
Retain the default settings for all ports.
l Enable ports. l Set Encapsulation Type to null. l It is recommended that you set Working Mode to Autonegotiation.
Prerequisites Ethernet fibers/cables and microwave links have been searched out in the operation of 8.4 Configuring the Network Topology.
Procedure Step 1 Create a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service.
----End
8.6.4.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Mapping between DSCP values, PHBs, and queue scheduling modes
See the following figure.
l DiffServ configuration should be the same for each service port. l If the type of packets trusted by service ports is DSCP, enabling DSCP demapping function for egress ports of a DS domain is not required, as the DSCP demapping function may change DSCP values.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies. NE1 is used as an example:
----End
8.6.4.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations) This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.
Context In this example, ETH OAM is configured during the service information configuration. Therefore, you can perform an LB test to verify service configurations.
Procedure Step 1 Verify Ethernet service configurations. The service NE1toNE2 is used as an example. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.5 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line Services) This section uses a VLAN-based E-Line service as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet services according to the service plan. 8.6.5.1 Networking Diagram The section describes the networking of NEs. 8.6.5.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information. 8.6.5.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS). 8.6.5.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations. 8.6.5.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet service information. 8.6.5.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS). 8.6.5.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations) This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.
8.6.5.1 Networking Diagram The section describes the networking of NEs. Configure Ethernet services according to 8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Chain Network) and the following requirements.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Table 8-73 Service requirements Requirement Description
Requirement Satisfaction
Servic e access capaci ty
Configure a port working in auto-negotiation mode for receiving a channel of electrical GE signals from NodeB 1.
NE 2 and NE 4 provide an electrical P&E port for receiving services.
Servic e protec tion
No
-
Servic e separa tion
Separate services from NodeB 1 and RAN 1 from each other using VLAN IDs:
Configure VLAN-based E-Line services on NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4.
Configure a port working in auto-negotiation mode for receiving a channel of electrical GE signals from RAN 1.
l VLAN ID of NodeB 1: 100 l VLAN ID of RAN 1: 200
QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
The priorities of Ethernet services transmitted over a microwave network are identified by DSCP values. All the NEs on the microwave network have the same mapping between PHBs and DSCP values for Ethernet services.
Configure DiffServ and perform service scheduling and forwarding based on DSCP values.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-34 Networking diagram for VLAN-based E-Line services
NOTE
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-MXUF4-1(IF).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-MXUF4-2(P&E).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port is 1-MXUF4-3(COMBO).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a GE optical interface is 1-MXUF4-4(GE(o)).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a GE electrical interface is 1-MXUF4-5(GE(e)).
8.6.5.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation
Procedure Step 1 Delete an E-LAN Service.
Step 2 Create a VLAN-based E-Line Service. NE1 is used as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.5.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
Data Preparation Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Mapping between DSCP values, PHBs, and queue scheduling modes
See the following figure.
l DiffServ configuration should be the same for each service port. l If the type of packets trusted by service ports is DSCP, enabling DSCP demapping function for egress ports of a DS domain is not required, as the DSCP demapping function may change DSCP values.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port. NE1 is used as an example: Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.5.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
Data Preparation NOTE
This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1 and NE2.
Procedure Step 1 Create an MD.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Create an MA.
Step 3 Create an MEP.
Step 4 Create a remote MEP.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 5 LB test. Perform an LB test by considering the MP whose ID is 1 as the source MP and the MP whose ID is 2 as the sink MP.
l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful. l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in the following table. Cause
Handling Procedure
Connecting to the peer end fails within the specified period.
Check whether services are interrupted.
Packets are lost.
Check whether the service traffic is higher than the transmission bandwidth. Check the link for bit errors.
----End Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.6.5.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet service information.
Context This section describes the procedure for configuring an Ethernet service between NodeB 1 and the RNC in end-to-end mode. The procedure for configuring an Ethernet service between RAN 1 and the RNC is similar.
Data Preparation Data
Value in This Example
Planning Guidelines
Service information
Service information configured on NodeB 1:
l Set names for networkwide E-Line services according to the network plan.
l Service name: NE1toNE4 l Source: NE1 (P&E) l Sink: NE4 (P&E) l VLAN ID: 100
l Set the same VLAN ID for the source and sink NEs.
Service information configured on RAN 1: l Service name: NE1toNE2 l Source: NE1 (P&E) l Sink: NE2 (P&E) l VLAN ID: 200 Port information
l Encapsulation Type: 802.1Q l Working Mode: Autonegotiation
l Enable ports. l For a port that carries VLAN-based E-Line services, set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q. l It is recommended that you set Working Mode to Autonegotiation.
Prerequisites Ethernet fibers/cables and microwave links have been searched out in the operation of 8.4 Configuring the Network Topology.
Procedure Step 1 Delete the E-LAN service. NE1 is used as an example. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Create a VLAN-based E-Line service. The RAN 1 service is used as an example.
----End
8.6.5.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Mapping between DSCP values, PHBs, and queue scheduling modes
See the following figure.
l DiffServ configuration should be the same for each service port. l If the type of packets trusted by service ports is DSCP, enabling DSCP demapping function for egress ports of a DS domain is not required, as the DSCP demapping function may change DSCP values.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain. NE1 is used as an example: Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies. NE1 is used as an example:
----End
8.6.5.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations) This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.
Context In this example, ETH OAM is configured during the service information configuration. Therefore, you can perform an LB test to verify service configurations.
Procedure Step 1 Verify Ethernet service configurations. The service NE1toNE2 is used as an example. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.6 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service) This section provides an example of how to configure an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service according to the plan. 8.6.6.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. 8.6.6.2 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection. 8.6.6.3 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information. 8.6.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS). 8.6.6.5 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations. 8.6.6.6 End-to-EndConfiguration Procedure (Ethernet Protection) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection. 8.6.6.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information. 8.6.6.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS). 8.6.6.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
8.6.6.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Configure Ethernet services according to 8.3.3 Microwave Ring Network and the following requirements. Table 8-74 Service requirements
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Requirement Description
Requirement Satisfaction
Servic e access capaci ty
Support the backhaul of one GE electrical signal from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 respectively. The port mode is auto-negotiation.
l Configure IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services.
Servic e protec tion
Configure protection for Ethernet services on ring networks.
Servic e separa tion
Ethernet services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 need to be transparently transmitted.
Qualit y of servic e (QoS)
The priorities of Ethernet services transmitted over a microwave network are identified by DSCP values. All the NEs on the microwave network have the same mapping between PHBs and DSCP values for Ethernet services.
l Configure Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).
Configure DiffServ and perform service scheduling and forwarding based on DSCP values.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-35 Networking diagram for IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services
NOTE
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-MXUF4-1(IF).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-MXUF4-2(P&E).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port is 1-MXUF4-3(COMBO).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a GE optical interface is 1-MXUF4-4(GE(o)).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a GE electrical interface is 1-MXUF4-5(GE(e)).
8.6.6.2 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation
Procedure Step 1 NE2 is used as an example.
----End
8.6.6.3 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Context NOTE
By default, IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services are configured on OptiX RTN 380. Therefore, you do not need to configure IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.
8.6.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
Data Preparation
Procedure Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies. NE1 is used as an example:
----End
8.6.6.5 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
Data Preparation NOTE
This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1 and NE2.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1 Create an MD.
Step 2 Create an MA.
Step 3 Create an MEP.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 4 Create a remote MEP.
Step 5 LB test. Perform an LB test by considering the MP whose ID is 1 as the source MP and the MP whose ID is 2 as the sink MP.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful. l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in the following table. Cause
Handling Procedure
Connecting to the peer end fails within the specified period.
Check whether services are interrupted.
Packets are lost.
Check whether the service traffic is higher than the transmission bandwidth. Check the link for bit errors.
----End
8.6.6.6 End-to-EndConfiguration Procedure (Ethernet Protection) This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.
Data Preparation
Procedure Step 1
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.6.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
Context NOTE
By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is configured on the OptiX RTN 380. Therefore, you only need to search out this service to add it.
Procedure Step 1 Search for the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service (native Ethernet service).
----End
8.6.6.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS). Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation
Procedure Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port. NE1 is used as an example: Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.6.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
Data Preparation NOTE
This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1 and NE2.
NE1
NE2
Port: 1-MXUF4-2
Port: 1-MXUF4-2
Procedure Step 1 Verify the Ethernet service configuration.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.7 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services) This section uses an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how to configure Ethernet services according to the service plan. 8.6.7.1 Networking Diagram The section describes the networking of NEs. 8.6.7.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information. 8.6.7.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS). 8.6.7.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations. 8.6.7.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information. 8.6.7.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS). 8.6.7.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
8.6.7.1 Networking Diagram The section describes the networking of NEs. Configure Ethernet services according to 8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Chain Network) and the following requirements.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Table 8-75 Service requirements Requirement Description
Requirement Satisfaction
Servic e access capaci ty
Configure a port working in auto-negotiation mode for receiving a channel of electrical GE signals from NodeB 1.
The OptiX RTN 380 provides an electrical P&E port for receiving services.
Servic e protec tion
No
-
Servic e separa tion
Separate services from NodeB 1 and RAN 1 from each other using VLAN IDs:
Configure IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services for NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4.
Configure a port working in auto-negotiation mode for receiving a channel of electrical GE signals from RAN 1.
l VLAN ID of NodeB 1: 100 l VLAN ID of RAN 1: 200
QoS
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
The priorities of Ethernet services transmitted over a microwave network are identified by DSCP values. All the NEs on the microwave network have the same mapping between PHBs and DSCP values for Ethernet services.
Configure DiffServ and perform service scheduling and forwarding based on DSCP values.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-36 Networking diagram for IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services
NOTE
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-MXUF4-1(IF).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-MXUF4-2(P&E).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port is 1-MXUF4-3(COMBO).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a GE optical interface is 1-MXUF4-4(GE(o)).
l
On the NMS, the logical port of a GE electrical interface is 1-MXUF4-5(GE(e)).
8.6.7.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation
Procedure Step 1 Deleting an E-LAN Service.
Step 2 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service. NE2 is used as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.7.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
Data Preparation Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Mapping between DSCP values, PHBs, and queue scheduling modes
See the following figure.
l DiffServ configuration should be the same for each service port. l If the type of packets trusted by service ports is DSCP, enabling DSCP demapping function for egress ports of a DS domain is not required, as the DSCP demapping function may change DSCP values.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.6.7.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
Data Preparation NOTE
This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1 and NE2.
Procedure Step 1 Create an MD.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Create an MA.
Step 3 Create an MEP.
Step 4 Create a remote MEP.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 5 LB test. Perform an LB test by considering the MP whose ID is 1 as the source MP and the MP whose ID is 2 as the sink MP.
l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful. l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in the following table. Cause
Handling Procedure
Connecting to the peer end fails within the specified period.
Check whether services are interrupted.
Packets are lost.
Check whether the service traffic is higher than the transmission bandwidth. Check the link for bit errors.
----End Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.6.7.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information) This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
Data Preparation Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Service name
E-LAN-00001
-
Service information
See the following picture.
l Set IDs and names for networkwide E-LAN services according to the network plan.
Prerequisites Ethernet fibers/cables and microwave links have been searched out in the operation of 8.4 Configuring the Network Topology.
Procedure Step 1 Delete the existing E-LAN service.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Create an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service.
----End
8.6.7.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS) This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Data Preparation Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principle
Mapping between DSCP values, PHBs, and queue scheduling modes
See the following figure.
l DiffServ configuration should be the same for each service port. l If the type of packets trusted by service ports is DSCP, enabling DSCP demapping function for egress ports of a DS domain is not required, as the DSCP demapping function may change DSCP values.
Procedure Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port. NE1 is used as an example:
Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port. NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies. NE1 is used as an example:
----End
8.6.7.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations) This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
Data Preparation NOTE
In this example, the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1 and NE2 is tested.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
NE1
NE2
Port: 1-MXUF4-2
Port: 1-MXUF4-2
Procedure Step 1 Verify service configurations.
----End
8.7 Configuring CPRI Services The OptiX RTN 380 supports transparent transmission of CPRI services. 8.7.1 Configuration Process (CPRI Services) The configuration process comprises configuring and verifying CPRI services. 8.7.2 Configuration Example (CPRI Services) In this example, the microwave link data has been configured.
8.7.1 Configuration Process (CPRI Services) The configuration process comprises configuring and verifying CPRI services. Figure 8-37 shows the process of configuring CPRI services.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-37 Flowchart Required
Start
Optional Delete Ethernet services.
Configure CPRI services. Verifying CPRI services.
End
NOTE
l This document describes the CPRI service configurations only for the OptiX RTN 380. l Before configuring CRPI services, you must have finished configuring proper microwave links for the CPRI services.
The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows. Table 8-76 Flowchart for configuring CPRI services Step
Operation
Remarks
1
Deleting E-LAN Services or Deleting ELine Services
Required. An NE can only transmit CPRI services or Ethernet services at a time. Delete the existing Ethernet services before you configure CPRI services.
2
Configuring CPRI Services
Required.
3
Verifying CPRI Service Configurations
The test result should show that the microwave link correctly transmits the CPRI services.
8.7.2 Configuration Example (CPRI Services) In this example, the microwave link data has been configured. 8.7.2.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. 8.7.2.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring data. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.7.2.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. On a network shown in Figure 8-38, the OptiX RTN 380s need to transparently transmit one 1.25 Gbit/s CPRI service. A hop of microwave link with 1+0 protection is already configured between the two OptiX RTN 380s. For the microwave link, the channel spacing is set to 500 MHz, the modulation scheme is 16QAM, and the AMAC function is disabled. Figure 8-38 Networking diagram (transparently transmitting CPRI services)
8.7.2.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring data.
Data Preparation Figure 8-39 Microwave link configurations for transmitting CPRI services
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1 Configure CPRI services.
Step 2 Verifying CPRI service configurations. ----End
8.8 Configuring Clocks To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy. 8.8.1 Configuration Process (Configuring a Clock) This section describes the process of configuring the clock source, clock protection, and output clock. 8.8.2 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Chain Network) This section describes how to configure clocks on a microwave chain network. 8.8.3 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Ring Network) This section describes how to configure clocks on a microwave ring network.
8.8.1 Configuration Process (Configuring a Clock) This section describes the process of configuring the clock source, clock protection, and output clock. Figure 8-40 shows the flowchart for configuring a clock.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-40 Flowchart for configuring a clock
Required Optional
Start
Configure the clock source.
Configure SSM or extended SSM protection.
Query the clock synchronization status.
End
The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows: Table 8-77 Process of configuring the clock
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Step
Operation
Remarks
1
8.9.6.1 Configuring the System Clock Source
Required. Set parameters as follows: Set Clock Source according to clock source planning information.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step
Operation
Remarks
2
8.9.6.2 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources
Required when the SSM or extended SSM protection is used. Set parameters as follows: l Set Protection Status according to the used protocol type. l If the clock uses the extended SSM protection, set Clock Source ID for the following clock sources: – Internal clock source of the NE that connects the intersecting ring and chain or connects the intersecting rings – Line clock source that is accessed to the ring through the NE that connects the intersecting ring and chain or connects the intersecting rings and is configured with the line clock source on the ring The values of Clock Source ID for these clock sources should be different.
3
6.6 Checking the Clock Status
Optional.
8.8.2 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Chain Network) This section describes how to configure clocks on a microwave chain network. 8.8.2.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. 8.8.2.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring clock on a microwave chain network.
8.8.2.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. Configure the clock for the network shown in Figure 8-41 according to 8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Chain Network) and the following requirements: l
Synchronize the microwave chain network with the clock of the RNC.
l
Provide clock signals to NodeB 1 and RAN 1 through P&E ports.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-41 Networking diagram for a microwave chain network
8.8.2.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring clock on a microwave chain network.
Data Preparation
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principles
Clock source information
See the following figure.
You need to configure an Ethernet clock source for each link.
Clock protection
Not in use.
In this example, a chain network is set up. Therefore, only priority-based clock source protection is used and the standard SSM or extended SSM protection is not used.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-42 Data Planning
NOTE
The following procedure takes configuring clocks on NE1 as an example. Configuring clocks on other NEs is similar.
Procedure Step 1 Configure the clock source.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Query the clock synchronization status. NE Clock Mode must be Tracing Mode for all NEs.
----End
8.8.3 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Ring Network) This section describes how to configure clocks on a microwave ring network. 8.8.3.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. 8.8.3.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring clocks.
8.8.3.1 Networking Diagram This section describes the networking of NEs. Configure clocks according to the following requirements. Figure 8-43 shows the networking diagram. l
The microwave ring network is directly synchronized with the clock of the radio network controller (RNC).
l
Clock synchronization signals are transmitted to each NodeB through the P&E port.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-43 Networking diagram (clocks on a microwave ring network)
8.8.3.2 Configuration Procedure This section describes the procedure for configuring clocks.
Data Preparation
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Item
Value in This Example
Planning Principles
Clock source information
See the following figure.
–
Clock protection
Standard SSM
In this example, a ring network is set up. Therefore, the standard SSM or extended SSM protection is used.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Figure 8-44 Data Planning
NOTE
The following procedure takes configuring clocks on NE1 as an example. Configuring clocks on other NEs is similar.
Procedure Step 1 Configure the clock sources.
Step 2 Configure protection for the clock sources. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
252
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 3 Query the clock synchronization status. NE Clock Mode must be Tracing Mode for all NEs.
----End
8.9 Common Service Configuration Operations This section provides hyperlinks to common service configuration operations. 8.9.1 Configuring the Network Topology This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of network topology configuration. 8.9.2 Configuring Microwave Links This section provides videos to common operations of microwave link configuration. 8.9.3 Configuring Ethernet Services on a Per-NE Basis This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of configuring Ethernet services on a per-NE basis. 8.9.4 Configuring Ethernet Services (in End-to-End Mode) Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
253
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of configuring Ethernet services in an end-to-end mode. 8.9.5 Configuring CPRI Services This section describes how to configure CPRI services. You must delete Ethernet service configurations before configuring CPRI services. 8.9.6 Configuring Clocks To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy.
8.9.1 Configuring the Network Topology This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of network topology configuration. 8.9.1.1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method The U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE, the network segment of the gateway NE IP address, or the NSAP addresses. In addition, the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, this search method creates NEs faster and more reliably. 8.9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually If you create NEs manually, you can create them one by one instead of in batches. 8.9.1.3 Changing an NE ID Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. This task does not interrupt services. 8.9.1.4 Changing an NE Name For easier identification of an NE in Main Topology, name the NE according to its geographical location or the device to which it is connected. 8.9.1.5 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN The VLAN ID used by an inband data communication network (DCN) must be different from the VLAN ID used by services. The bandwidth of an inband DCN must meet the requirements of the transmission network for managing messages. 8.9.1.6 Configuring Access Control When an NE is connected to the network management system (NMS) using an Ethernet service port, you must configure access control. 8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method The network management system (NMS) can find the fibers connected to a specified microwave port or Ethernet port by using the search method. This method is the most common method for creating microwave links. 8.9.1.8 Creating a Fiber/Cable Manually You can create a fiber by specifying the ports connected by the fiber. This method can be used to create both microwave links and Ethernet links.
8.9.1.1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method The U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address of the gateway NE, the network segment of the gateway NE IP address, or the NSAP addresses. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
254
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
In addition, the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, this search method creates NEs faster and more reliably.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
The network management system (NMS) is communicating with NEs properly.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
This task can also be performed on the Web LCT, but the steps are different from those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure: l
Creates an NE by using the search method.
l
Creates an NE by using the NE Search method (only on the Web LCT) if the NE is the gateway NE and belongs to the same network segment as the NMS server.
Procedure Step 1 Create an NE by using the search method (U2000).
Step 2 Create an NE by using the NE Search method (Web LCT).
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
255
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually If you create NEs manually, you can create them one by one instead of in batches.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
The network management system (NMS) is properly communicating with the NE to be created.
l
If the NE to be created is a non-gateway NE, the corresponding gateway NE has been created.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000. NOTE
If new NEs are created manually on the Web LCT: l SSL is recommended for communication with NEs. Set the port number to 5432 and perform the following steps to replace the SSL certificate: l Delete the WebLCT\conf\certificate directory on the Web LCT. l Copy the server\etc\ssl\nemanager\default directory on the U2000 to the path WebLCT\conf on the Web LCT. Rename default to certificate. Note that the installation path on the Web LCT should not contain Chinese characters, spaces, or special characters. l Restart the Web LCT. l Install the SSL certificate to the NE using the U2000. For details, see the Security Configuration Maintenance & Hardening.
Context The following procedure creates NE1 manually. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
256
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1 Creating an NE manually
----End
8.9.1.3 Changing an NE ID Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. This task does not interrupt services.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure changes an NE ID to the planned value listed in the following table. Parameter
Value
New ID
1
New Extended ID
9
After changing the NE ID, you need to restart the NE. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
257
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1 Changing an NE ID
----End
8.9.1.4 Changing an NE Name For easier identification of an NE in Main Topology, name the NE according to its geographical location or the device to which it is connected.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure changes an NE name to the planned value listed in the following table. Parameter
Value
Name
NE1
Procedure Step 1 Changing an NE Name Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
258
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.9.1.5 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN The VLAN ID used by an inband data communication network (DCN) must be different from the VLAN ID used by services. The bandwidth of an inband DCN must meet the requirements of the transmission network for managing messages.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure sets the VLAN ID and bandwidth to the planned values listed in the following table for an inband DCN. Parameter
Value
VLAN ID
4094
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
512Kbit/s
Procedure Step 1 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
259
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.9.1.6 Configuring Access Control When an NE is connected to the network management system (NMS) using an Ethernet service port, you must configure access control.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Precautions NOTE
l Do not use the default IP address of an access control interface to access the public network (for example, Internet). l The default IP address is a temporary address and is only used for the DCN plug-and-play of the NE. Users must modify the default IP address in a timely manner.
Context The following procedure configures the access control function for the port P&E according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Parameter
Value
Enabled Status
Enabled (default value)
IP Address
10.0.0.1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
260
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Parameter
Value
Subnet Mask
255.255.0.0
Procedure Step 1 Configuring Access Control
----End
8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method The network management system (NMS) can find the fibers connected to a specified microwave port or Ethernet port by using the search method. This method is the most common method for creating microwave links.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Context The following procedure creates a microwave link or an Ethernet link on the RTN subnet using the search method.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
261
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1 Create a microwave link on the RTN subnet using the search method.
Step 2 Create an Ethernet link on the RTN subnet using the search method.
----End
8.9.1.8 Creating a Fiber/Cable Manually You can create a fiber by specifying the ports connected by the fiber. This method can be used to create both microwave links and Ethernet links.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
262
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Context The following procedure creates a fiber manually according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table. Parameter
Value
Fiber/Cable Type
Radio Link
Name
l-1
Source NE
NE1
Source NE Subrack-Slot-Board Type-Port
1-MXUF4-1(IF)
Sink NE
NE2
Sink NE Subrack-Slot-Board Type-Port
1-MXUF4-1(IF)
Automatically Allocate IP Address
No
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.2 Configuring Microwave Links This section provides videos to common operations of microwave link configuration. 8.9.2.1 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group If microwave links are configured with 1+1 hot standby (HSB) protection, you need to create a corresponding microwave 1+1 protection group. 8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link This task helps you manage microwave links by hop. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1) This section describes how to synchronize data between the main and standby NEs in a 1+1 HSB protection group.
8.9.2.1 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group If microwave links are configured with 1+1 hot standby (HSB) protection, you need to create a corresponding microwave 1+1 protection group.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
If no optical splitter is used when 1+1 HSB is configured, E-LAG needs to be configured.
l
The GE ports connected by a cascade port must be configured with the same port type. For example, both are configured with "COMBO".
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure creates a microwave 1+1 protection group according to planned values provided in the following table. l
l
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
creates a microwave 1+1 protection group in LAG Mode according to planned values provided in the following table. Parameter
Value
Service Protection Type
LAG Mode
Reversion Mode
Revertive
WTR Time (s)
600 (default value)
Enable Reverse Switching
Enable
Working/Protection Unit Type
Working Unit
Service Port
P&E and GE(e)
cascade Port
Combo
creates a microwave 1+1 protection group in Split Mode according to planned values provided in the following table. Parameter
Value
Service Protection Type
LAG Mode
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
264
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Parameter
Value
Reversion Mode
Revertive
WTR Time (s)
600 (default value)
Enable Reverse Switching
Enable
Working/Protection Unit Type
Working Unit
Service Port
GE(o)
cascade Port
Combo
Procedure Step 1 Create a microwave 1+1 protection group in LAG Mode.
Step 2 Create a microwave 1+1 protection group in Split Mode.
----End Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
265
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link This task helps you manage microwave links by hop.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
The NEs at the two ends of a microwave link hop are communicating properly.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Precautions The following parameters of the NEs on a hop of microwave link are automatically synchronized: Link ID, IF Channel Bandwidth, AMAC, Guaranteed AMAC Capacity, Full AMAC Capacity, Modulation Mode, T/R Spacing(MHz), and ATPC. That is, if one of the preceding parameters is modified on an NE, the modification is automatically duplicated on the peer NE.
Background Information The following procedure configures basic information for the hop of microwave link shown in the following figure by configuring NE1. Parameter
Link
NE ID
9-49316(Local Radio Terminal) 9-49317(Opposite Radio Terminal)
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Link ID
2
IF Channel Bandwidth
250MHz
AMAC
Enabled
Guaranteed AMAC Capacity
QPSK Strong
Full AMAC Capacity
16QAM/737Mbit/s
TX Frequency(MHz)
73500
ATPC
Disabled
TX power (dBm)
10
Power to Be Frequency(dBm)
-40
TX Status
unmute
Antenna Polarization Direction
V
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
266
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1) This section describes how to synchronize data between the main and standby NEs in a 1+1 HSB protection group.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
The GE ports connected by a cascade port must be configured with the same port type. For example, both are configured with "COMBO".
l
You can initiate configuration synchronization only on a main NE in the working state.
l
If both NEs are in the working or protection state, you cannot initiate configuration synchronization.
l
If an NE is being upgraded or works in CPRI mode, you cannot initiate configuration synchronization.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Procedure Step 1
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.9.3 Configuring Ethernet Services on a Per-NE Basis This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of configuring Ethernet services on a per-NE basis. 8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG If the bandwidth or availability of the Ethernet link between two NEs needs to be improved, create a link aggregation group (LAG). 8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) is configured by creating ERPS instances. 8.9.3.3 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service By creating point-to-point transparently transmitted Ethernet line (E-Line) services, you can transparently transmit all packets received at the source to the sink. 8.9.3.4 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service By creating VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) services, you can transmit service packets from the source to a sink based on the VLAN IDs carried by the packets. 8.9.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service An IEEE 802.1D bridge is a transparent bridge and functions as a switching domain. 8.9.3.6 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service An IEEE 802.1Q bridge is a virtual bridge (VB), which can be divided by VLANs into several switching domains. 8.9.3.7 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge This section describes how to change the logical ports mounted to a bridge and how to modify the attributes of the ports. 8.9.3.8 Deleting an E-Line Service When an Ethernet line (E-Line) service is not used, you need to delete the service to release Ethernet resources. 8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
268
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
When an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service is not used, you need to delete the service to release Ethernet resources. 8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain This section describes how to modify the mapping between packet priorities and per-hop behaviors (PHBs) in the ingress or egress direction of a Differentiated Services (DS) domain. 8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port This section describes how to set the packet type trusted by a port. 8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port If DSCP-based Diffserv is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping. 8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies This section describes how to set queue scheduling policies for an egress port.
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG If the bandwidth or availability of the Ethernet link between two NEs needs to be improved, create a link aggregation group (LAG).
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure: l
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Create a non-load sharing LAG to protect the Ethernet link from a UNI-side equipment to an NE, according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table. Parameter
NE
LAG No.
Assign Automatically
LAG Name
LAG
LAG Type
Static (default value)
Load Sharing
Non-Sharing
LAG Priority
32768 (default value)
Packet Receive Timeout Period
Long period
Main Ports
P&E
Standby Ports
GE(e)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
269
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Create a load sharing LAG to increase Ethernet bandwidth of Ethernet links, according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table. Parameter
NE
LAG No.
Assign Automatically
LAG Name
LAG
LAG Type
Static (default value)
Load Sharing
Sharing
LAG Priority
32768 (default value)
Packet Receive Timeout Period
Long period
LAG Min Active Link Threshold
2
Main Ports
P&E
Standby Ports
COMBO GE(o)
l
Create a LAG for configuring 1+1 protection according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table. Parameter
NE
LAG No.
Assign Automatically (default value).
LAG type
Static (default value)
Load sharing type
Non-load sharing (default value)
LAG priority
32768 (default value)
Main port
P&E
Procedure Step 1 Create a non-load sharing LAG.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
270
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Create a load sharing LAG.
Step 3 Create a LAG for configuring 1+1 protection.
----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
271
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) is configured by creating ERPS instances.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure creates an ERPS instance according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table. Parameter
Value
ERPS ID
1
East Port
GE(o)
West Port
IF
RPL Owner Ring Node Flag
RPL Port
RPL Port
GE(o)
Control VLAN
4093
Procedure Step 1
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
272
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.9.3.3 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service By creating point-to-point transparently transmitted Ethernet line (E-Line) services, you can transparently transmit all packets received at the source to the sink.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Precautions In point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services, Layer 2 protocol packets are transmitted as common services. Therefore, Layer 2 protocol packets cannot be transmitted first in the case of link congestion.
Context The following procedure creates the point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
273
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.4 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service By creating VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) services, you can transmit service packets from the source to a sink based on the VLAN IDs carried by the packets.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure creates the VLAN-based E-Line service shown in the following figure. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
274
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service An IEEE 802.1D bridge is a transparent bridge and functions as a switching domain.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Precautions l
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
In IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services, Layer 2 protocol packets are transmitted as common services. Therefore, Layer 2 protocol packets cannot be transmitted first in the case of link congestion. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
275
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
By default, the NE carries an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service that is mounted to all the ports of the NE.
Context The following procedure creates the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service shown in the following figure.
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.6 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service An IEEE 802.1Q bridge is a virtual bridge (VB), which can be divided by VLANs into several switching domains.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
276
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Precautions IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services can be configured to transparently transmit Layer 2 protocol packets as packets with a per-hop behavior (PHB) of CS7.
Context The following procedure creates the IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service shown in the following figure.
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.7 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge This section describes how to change the logical ports mounted to a bridge and how to modify the attributes of the ports.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
277
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services have been configured.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following steps remove port GE4, that is, a GE(o) port, from the ports mounted with E-LAN services and delete VLAN 100 from the VLAN list of microwave ports.
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.8 Deleting an E-Line Service When an Ethernet line (E-Line) service is not used, you need to delete the service to release Ethernet resources.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
An E-Line service has been configured.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
278
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure deletes the E-Line service whose ID is 1.
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service When an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service is not used, you need to delete the service to release Ethernet resources.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
An E-LAN service has been configured.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure deletes the E-LAN service whose ID is 1. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
279
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain This section describes how to modify the mapping between packet priorities and per-hop behaviors (PHBs) in the ingress or egress direction of a Differentiated Services (DS) domain.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure changes the mapping for a DS domain according to the planned parameter values listed in the following tables. The following table provides the values of the parameters on the Ingress tab page.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
CVLAN/SVLAN
MPLS EXP
IP DSCP
PHB
Default value
Default value
0-7
BE
8-15
AF11
16-23
AF21
24-31
AF31
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
280
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
CVLAN/SVLAN
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
MPLS EXP
IP DSCP
PHB
32-39
AF41
40-47
EF
48-55
CS6
56-63
CS7
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port This section describes how to set the packet type trusted by a port.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure changes the packet types trusted by the Ethernet ports and microwave port to the planned value listed in the following table. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
281
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Parameter
Packet Type
IF
ip-dscp
P&E COMBO GE(o) GE(e)
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port If DSCP-based Diffserv is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure sets Egress DSCP Mapping Status to Disabled. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
282
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies This section describes how to set queue scheduling policies for an egress port.
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure configures queue scheduling policies for a microwave port according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Parameter
Grooming Policy After Reloading
CS7
SP
CS6
SP
EF
SP
AF4
SP
AF3
WRR(weight=25)
AF2
WRR(weight=25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
283
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Parameter
Grooming Policy After Reloading
AF1
WRR(weight=25)
BE
WRR(weight=25)
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.4 Configuring Ethernet Services (in End-to-End Mode) This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of configuring Ethernet services in an end-to-end mode. 8.9.4.1 Searching for Native Ethernet Services By searching for native Ethernet services, you can synchronize the configured native Ethernet service data from the NE layer of the NMS to the network layer. 8.9.4.2 Creating a Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service This section describes how to configure a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service in an end-to-end manner. 8.9.4.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service This section describes how to create a VLAN-based E-Line service in an end-to-end manner. 8.9.4.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service This section describes how to configure an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service in an endto-end manner. 8.9.4.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service This section describes how to configure an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service in an endto-end manner. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
284
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.9.4.1 Searching for Native Ethernet Services By searching for native Ethernet services, you can synchronize the configured native Ethernet service data from the NE layer of the NMS to the network layer.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
Native Ethernet services have been correctly configured.
l
Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Precautions l
Verify that cables have been created between the NEs on the topology.
l
This task searches for native Ethernet services that have been correctly configured but for which no topologies have been created at the network layer of the NMS. For native Ethernet services for which topologies have been created at the network layer of the NMS, skip this task.
Context The following procedure synchronizes the native E-LAN services in a specified area to the network layer of the NMS.
Procedure Step 1
----End Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
285
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
8.9.4.2 Creating a Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service This section describes how to configure a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service in an end-to-end manner.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
Fiber/Cable connections have been created between NEs in the main topology.
l
Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.
l
The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Precautions NOTE
By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is created on an NE. The service is mounted to all ports of the NE. Delete this E-LAN service before you create a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service.
Context The following procedure creates a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table. Parameter
Value
Service name
NE1toNE2
Source NE
NE1
Source port
P&E
Sink NE
NE2
Sink port
P&E
Procedure Step 1
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
286
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.9.4.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service This section describes how to create a VLAN-based E-Line service in an end-to-end manner.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
Fiber/Cable connections have been created between NEs in the main topology.
l
Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.
l
The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Precautions NOTE
By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is created on an NE. The service is mounted to all ports of the NE. Delete this E-LAN service before you create a VLAN-based E-Line service.
Context The following procedure creates a VLAN-based E-Line service according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Parameter
Value
Service name
NE1toNE2
Source NE
NE1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
287
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Parameter
Value
Source port
P&E
Source C-VLAN
200
Sink NE
NE2
Sink port
P&E
Sink C-VLAN
200
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.4.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service This section describes how to configure an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service in an endto-end manner.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
Fiber/Cable connections have been created between NEs in the main topology.
l
Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.
l
The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
288
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Precautions NOTE
By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is configured on an NE. The service is mounted to all ports of the NE. You only need to search out the E-LAN service and then create the corresponding end-to-end service at the network layer. This example assumes that the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service configured by default is deleted.
Context The following procedure creates an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service according to the planned parameter values listed in the following tables. Table 8-78 Basic information Parameter
Value
Service Type
E-LAN
Service Name
E-LAN-00001
Table 8-79 Information about mounted ports Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
Ports mounted to a bridge
1-MXUF4-2 (P&E)
1-MXUF4-1 (IF)
1-MXUF4-1 (IF)
1-MXUF4-1 (IF)
1-MXUF4-1 (IF)
1-MXUF4-2 (P&E)
1-MXUF4-4 (GE(o))
1-MXUF4-2 (P&E)
1-MXUF4-4 (GE(o))
Procedure Step 1
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
289
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
8.9.4.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service This section describes how to configure an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service in an endto-end manner.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
Fiber/Cable connections have been created between NEs in the main topology.
l
Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.
l
The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
The Web LCT does not support this operation.
Precautions NOTE
By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is created on an NE. Delete this E-LAN service before you create an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service. This example describes how to create an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service.
Context The following procedure creates an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service according to the planned parameter values listed in the following tables.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
290
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Table 8-80 Basic information Parameter
Value
Service Type
E-LAN
Service Name
E-LAN-00001
Table 8-81 Service information Parameter
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
Ports mounted to a bridge
1-MXUF4-2 (P&E) (VLAN ID:100,200)
1-MXUF4-1 (IF) (VLAN ID: 100,200)
1-MXUF4-4 (GE(o)) (VLAN ID:100)
1-MXUF4-1 (IF) (VLAN ID: 100)
1-MXUF4-1 (IF) (VLAN ID: 100,200)
1-MXUF4-4 (GE(o)) (VLAN ID:100)
1-MXUF4-1 (IF) (VLAN ID: 100)
1-MXUF4-2 (P&E) (VLAN ID:100)
1-MXUF4-2 (P&E) (VLAN ID:200)
Procedure Step 1
----End
8.9.5 Configuring CPRI Services This section describes how to configure CPRI services. You must delete Ethernet service configurations before configuring CPRI services.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
291
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
Microwave links have been configured.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Precautions 1.
Configure CPRI services for the end that is remote from the NMS before configuring CPRI services for the end that is close to the NMS, to prevent the remote NE from being unreachable to the NMS when a link interruption occurs due to inconsistent link types.
2.
When deleting the Ethernet port, delete services and the QoS policy configured for services on the port first.
3.
If the rate of the CPRI port is set, the channel spacing and modulation scheme must be set based on the Table 8-82. Table 8-82 Radio working mode that the OptiX RTN 380 supports Rate
Transparent Transmission of Complete CPRI Frames
Transparent Transmission of CPRI Payloads
1.25 Gbit/s
l 16QAM/500MHz
-
l 16QAM Strong/750MHz 2.5 Gbit/s
32QAM/750MHz
l 64QAM/500MHz l 16QAM/750MHz
4.
The NE will be cold reset when the CPRI port is activated.
Context The following procedure: l
Configure CPRI services for NE1. The port rate is 1.25 Gbit/s. NOTE
To switch the port rate between 1.25 Gbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s in CPRI mode, the operations are similar to those in CPRI service configuration.
l
Change the CPRI mode to a non-CPRI mode.
Procedure Step 1 Configure CPRI services. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
292
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Step 2 Change the CPRI mode to a non-CPRI mode.
----End
8.9.6 Configuring Clocks To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy. 8.9.6.1 Configuring the System Clock Source If OptiX RTN 380 is used to transmit CPRI services, there is no need to configure clock sources. 8.9.6.2 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. For a simple network (such as a chain network), protection for the clock sources is not required or the clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. For a complex network (such as a ring network, a ring with chain network, or a network consisting of intersectant rings), clock sources need to be protected by using the standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol or the extended SSM protocol.
8.9.6.1 Configuring the System Clock Source If OptiX RTN 380 is used to transmit CPRI services, there is no need to configure clock sources. Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
293
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Prerequisites You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following steps configure IFinterface as the clock source with the highest priority, the next is GE(o).
Procedure Step 1 Configuring the system clock source.
----End
8.9.6.2 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. For a simple network (such as a chain network), protection for the clock sources is not required or the clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. For a complex network (such as a ring network, a ring with chain network, or a network consisting of intersectant rings), clock sources need to be protected by using the standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol or the extended SSM protocol.
Prerequisites l
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l
Clock sources have been configured.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
294
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
Tools, Equipment, and Materials U2000 NOTE
Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
Context The following procedure: l
Enables the standard SSM protocol.
l
Enables the extended SSM protocol and sets the IDs of the clock source IF, GE(o) and the internal clock source to 1, 2 and 3 respectively. NOTE
l It is recommended that you enable the standard SSM protocol for a simple ring network and enable the extended SSM protocol for a complex network (for example, a network consisting of intersectant rings, which may provide the network with multiple clock sources). l If the extended SSM protocol is enabled, set IDs for the following clock sources: l Reference clock sources for a ring network l Local clock source of an NE that traces a clock source outside the ring network Each clock source ID must be unique and is unrelated to priorities.
Procedure Step 1 Enable the standard SSM protocol.
Step 2 Enable the extended SSM protocol.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
295
OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data
----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
296